Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 243

Product Description

OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission


System
V100R008

Issue 02

Date 2008-03-29

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service.
Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: support@huawei.com

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 2 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

About This Document

Author
Prepared by Date
Reviewed by Date

Approved by Date

Summary
This document includes:

Chapter Details

1 Network Application Describes the OptiX OSN 1500 and its position in the
network.
2 Function This chapter generally describes the features of the OptiX
OSN 1500 in the terms of capacity, interface, built-in WDM
technology, ROP system, REG, protection, TCM and
network management.
3 Hardware Describes the mechanical structure and the adaptable
cabinet installation of the OptiX OSN 1500.
4 Software Describes the software system of the OptiX OSN 1500. It
includes intelligent software, board software, NE software
and NM software.
5 Data Features Describes the Ethernet, RPR and ATM features of the
OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of function, application and
protection.
6 DCN Features This chapter describes the DCN feature supported by the
OptiX OSN 1500.
7 ASON Features This chapter introduces the ASON features of the OptiX
OSN 1500 in terms of service classes and application.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 3 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Chapter Details

8 Protection Describes protection modes (including equipment level


and network level) and characteristics supported by the
OptiX OSN 1500.
9 Clock This chapter describes the clock function of the OptiX
OSN 1500.
10 OAM This chapter describes main technical characteristics of
the OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of maintenance and
centralized management.
11 Security This chapter describes main technical characteristics of
Management the OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of safe operation.
12 Technical This chapter describes the interface specifications,
Specifications transmission performance and environment requirements
for the OptiX OSN 1500.
A Compliant This appendix lists international standards to which the
Standards OptiX OSN 1500 conforms in terms of design and
performance.
B Basic Principle This appendix lists the basic principle of several
technologies which the OptiX OSN 1500 adopts.
C Glossary This appendix lists the terms used in this document.
D Acronyms and The appendix lists the acronyms and abbreviations used
Abbreviations in this document.

History
Issue Details Date Author Approved by

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 4 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Contents

1 Network Application ..................................................................................................... 11


2 Function.........................................................................................................................15
2.1 Capacity ......................................................................................................................................... 15
2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity........................................................................................................ 15
2.1.2 Slot Access Capacity ............................................................................................................. 15
2.2 Service ........................................................................................................................................... 18
2.2.1 SDH Services ........................................................................................................................ 18
2.2.2 PDH Services ........................................................................................................................ 18
2.2.3 Ethernet Services .................................................................................................................. 18
2.2.4 RPR Services ........................................................................................................................ 18
2.2.5 ATM Services......................................................................................................................... 19
2.2.6 DDN Services ........................................................................................................................ 19
2.2.7 SAN Services ........................................................................................................................ 19
2.2.8 Service Access Capacity ....................................................................................................... 19
2.3 Interface ......................................................................................................................................... 20
2.3.1 Service Interfaces.................................................................................................................. 20
2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces.................................................................................. 21
2.4 Networking ..................................................................................................................................... 22
2.5 Built-in WDM Technology ............................................................................................................... 24
2.6 External Clock Output Shutdown Function .................................................................................... 25
2.7 110 V/220 V Power Supply ............................................................................................................ 25
2.8 REG Function................................................................................................................................. 25
2.9 Protection ....................................................................................................................................... 27
2.9.1 Equipment Level Protection................................................................................................... 27
2.9.2 Network Level Protection....................................................................................................... 27
2.10 ASON Features ............................................................................................................................ 28
2.11 TCM .............................................................................................................................................. 28
2.12 E13/M13 Function ........................................................................................................................ 29
2.13 RPR .............................................................................................................................................. 29
2.14 ETH-OAM..................................................................................................................................... 30
2.15 Software Package Loading .......................................................................................................... 30
2.16 Hot Patch...................................................................................................................................... 31
2.17 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression .................................................................................................... 31

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 5 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

2.18 PRBS Function............................................................................................................................. 32


2.19 Board Version Replacement ........................................................................................................ 32
2.20 DCC Transparent Transmission Through External Clock Interfaces ........................................... 33
2.21 NSF Function ............................................................................................................................... 34
2.22 OAM Information Interworking ..................................................................................................... 34
2.23 Clock ............................................................................................................................................ 35

3 Hardware .......................................................................................................................37
3.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 37
3.2 Cabinet ........................................................................................................................................... 37
3.3 OptiX OSN 1500A Subrack ............................................................................................................ 39
3.3.1 Structure ................................................................................................................................ 39
3.3.2 Slot Allocation ........................................................................................................................ 40
3.3.3 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................... 47
3.4 OptiX OSN 1500B Subrack............................................................................................................ 48
3.4.1 Structure ................................................................................................................................ 48
3.4.2 Slot Allocation ........................................................................................................................ 49
3.4.3 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................... 59
3.5 Boards ............................................................................................................................................ 59
3.5.1 Board Type ............................................................................................................................ 59
3.5.2 SDH Processing Boards........................................................................................................ 62
3.5.3 PDH Processing Boards........................................................................................................ 63
3.5.4 DDN Processing Boards........................................................................................................ 65
3.5.5 Data Processing Boards........................................................................................................ 65
3.5.6 WDM Boards ......................................................................................................................... 67
3.5.7 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards........................................................................................... 68
3.5.8 Auxiliary Boards..................................................................................................................... 69

4 Software.........................................................................................................................71
4.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 71
4.2 Board Software............................................................................................................................... 72
4.3 NE Software ................................................................................................................................... 72
4.4 T2000 System ................................................................................................................................ 73
4.5 ASON Software .............................................................................................................................. 74

5 Data Features ................................................................................................................77


5.1 Ethernet Features........................................................................................................................... 77
5.1.1 Functions ............................................................................................................................... 77
5.1.2 Application ............................................................................................................................. 84
5.1.3 Protection .............................................................................................................................. 88
5.2 RPR Features................................................................................................................................. 91
5.2.1 Functions ............................................................................................................................... 92
5.2.2 Application ............................................................................................................................. 96
5.2.3 Protection .............................................................................................................................. 98

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 6 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

5.3 ATM Features ............................................................................................................................... 102


5.3.1 Functions ............................................................................................................................. 102
5.3.2 Application ........................................................................................................................... 104
5.3.3 Protection ............................................................................................................................ 108
5.4 SAN Features............................................................................................................................... 109
5.5 DDN Features .............................................................................................................................. 109
5.5.1 Functions ............................................................................................................................. 109
5.5.2 Application ............................................................................................................................110
5.5.3 Protection ............................................................................................................................. 111

6 DCN Features .............................................................................................................. 113


6.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................113
6.1.1 Background of SDH DCN .....................................................................................................114
6.1.2 SDH DCN Solutions .............................................................................................................115
6.1.3 DCC Resource Allocation Modes .........................................................................................115
6.2 HWECC.........................................................................................................................................116
6.2.1 Features................................................................................................................................116
6.2.2 Application ............................................................................................................................117
6.3 IP Over DCC .................................................................................................................................118
6.3.1 Features................................................................................................................................118
6.3.2 Application ............................................................................................................................119
6.4 OSI Over DCC.............................................................................................................................. 120
6.4.1 Features............................................................................................................................... 120
6.4.2 Application ........................................................................................................................... 120

7 ASON Features............................................................................................................123
7.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies ........................................................................................ 123
7.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links .......................................................................................... 123
7.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links ................................................................................................. 125
7.2 End-to-End Service Configuration................................................................................................ 125
7.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration.............................................................................. 126
7.4 ASON Clock Tracing .................................................................................................................... 127
7.5 SLA............................................................................................................................................... 130
7.6 Diamond Services ........................................................................................................................ 131
7.7 Gold Services ............................................................................................................................... 135
7.8 Silver Services.............................................................................................................................. 136
7.9 Copper Services........................................................................................................................... 138
7.10 Iron Services .............................................................................................................................. 139
7.11 Tunnels ....................................................................................................................................... 140
7.12 Service Association .................................................................................................................... 142
7.13 Service Optimization .................................................................................................................. 143
7.14 Service Migration........................................................................................................................ 143
7.15 Reverting Services to Original Routes ....................................................................................... 144

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 7 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

7.16 Preset Restoring Trail................................................................................................................. 145


7.17 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail................................................................................................... 145
7.18 Equilibrium of Network Traffic .................................................................................................... 147
7.19 Shared Risk Link Group ............................................................................................................. 147
7.20 ASON Trail Group....................................................................................................................... 148
7.21 Protocol Encryption .................................................................................................................... 149
7.22 Alarms of the Control Plane ....................................................................................................... 149

8 Protection ....................................................................................................................151
8.1 Equipment Level Protection ......................................................................................................... 151
8.1.1 TPS Protection for Tributary Boards.................................................................................... 151
8.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect, Timing and SCC Units......................................... 152
8.1.3 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards ..................................................................................... 153
8.1.4 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards ........................................................................................... 154
8.1.5 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit...................................................................... 154
8.1.6 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit .................................................................. 154
8.1.7 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply ............................................................. 155
8.1.8 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions .................................................... 155
8.2 Network Level Protection ............................................................................................................. 156
8.2.1 Linear MSP .......................................................................................................................... 156
8.2.2 MSP Ring............................................................................................................................. 157
8.2.3 SNCP................................................................................................................................... 158
8.2.4 DNI....................................................................................................................................... 163
8.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection ................................................................................... 164
8.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP ................................................................................................... 164
8.2.7 RPR Protection.................................................................................................................... 165
8.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection ............................................................................................... 167

9 Clock ............................................................................................................................169
9.1 Clock Source ................................................................................................................................ 169
9.1.1 External Clock Source ......................................................................................................... 169
9.1.2 Line Clock Source ............................................................................................................... 169
9.1.3 Tributary Clock Source ........................................................................................................ 169
9.1.4 Internal Clock Source .......................................................................................................... 170
9.2 Clock Working Mode .................................................................................................................... 170
9.2.1 Locked Mode ....................................................................................................................... 170
9.2.2 Holdover Mode .................................................................................................................... 170
9.2.3 Free-Run Mode ................................................................................................................... 170
9.3 Clock Outputs............................................................................................................................... 170
9.4 Clock Protection ........................................................................................................................... 171
9.4.1 Clock Configuration with SSM Not Enabled ........................................................................ 171
9.4.2 Clock Configuration with Standard SSM Enabled ............................................................... 171
9.4.3 Clock Configuration with Extended SSM Enabled .............................................................. 172

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 8 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

9.5 Tributary Retiming ........................................................................................................................ 173


9.5.1 Retiming Principle................................................................................................................ 173
9.5.2 Application of the Retiming Function ................................................................................... 174

10 OAM ...........................................................................................................................177
10.1 Operation and Maintenance....................................................................................................... 177
10.2 Network Management ................................................................................................................ 178

11 Security Management ...............................................................................................181


11.1 Authentication Management....................................................................................................... 181
11.2 Authorization Management......................................................................................................... 181
11.3 Network Security Management .................................................................................................. 182
11.4 System Security Management ................................................................................................... 183
11.5 Log Management........................................................................................................................ 183
11.5.1 NE Security Log Management........................................................................................... 183
11.5.2 Syslog Management .......................................................................................................... 183

12 Technical Specifications ..........................................................................................185


12.1 Interface Types........................................................................................................................... 185
12.2 Specifications of the Optical Interface ........................................................................................ 186
12.2.1 SDH Optical Interface........................................................................................................ 186
12.2.2 Ethernet Optical Interface.................................................................................................. 190
12.2.3 ATM Optical Interface ........................................................................................................ 191
12.2.4 Laser Safety Class ............................................................................................................ 192
12.3 Specifications of Electrical Interfaces......................................................................................... 192
12.3.1 PDH Electrical Interface .................................................................................................... 192
12.3.2 DDN Interface.................................................................................................................... 193
12.3.3 Auxiliary Interface .............................................................................................................. 194
12.4 Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance ....................................................................... 195
12.4.1 Clock Interface Type.......................................................................................................... 195
12.4.2 Timing and Synchronization Performance......................................................................... 195
12.5 Transmission Performance ........................................................................................................ 196
12.6 Timeslot Numbering ................................................................................................................... 196
12.7 Power Supply Specification........................................................................................................ 197
12.8 Power Consumption and Weight of Boards ............................................................................... 197
12.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility.................................................................................................... 200
12.10 Safety Certification ................................................................................................................... 202
12.11 Environmental Specification ..................................................................................................... 203
12.12 Environment Requirement ....................................................................................................... 203
12.12.1 Environment for Storage.................................................................................................. 203
12.12.2 Environment for Transportation ....................................................................................... 205
12.12.3 Environment for Operation .............................................................................................. 208

A Compliant Standards ................................................................................................. 211

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 9 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

A.1 ITU-T Recommendations..............................................................................................................211


A.2 IEEE Standards............................................................................................................................ 213
A.3 IETF Standards ............................................................................................................................ 214
A.4 ANSI Standards............................................................................................................................ 214
A.5 Environment Related Standards .................................................................................................. 214
A.6 EMC Standards............................................................................................................................ 215
A.7 Safety Compliance Standards ..................................................................................................... 216
A.8 Protection Standards.................................................................................................................... 216
A.9 ASON Standards.......................................................................................................................... 217

B Basic Principle ...........................................................................................................219


B.1 Introduction to SDH ..................................................................................................................... 219
B.1.1 SDH Levels ......................................................................................................................... 219
B.1.2 Multiplexing Structure.......................................................................................................... 219
B.1.3 Basic Frame Structure......................................................................................................... 220
B.1.4 SOH Description ................................................................................................................. 220
B.1.5 Path Overhead (POH) Bytes Description............................................................................ 223
B.2 Introduction to ATM ...................................................................................................................... 224
B.2.1 Introduction to ATM ............................................................................................................. 224
B.2.2 ATM Cell Structure .............................................................................................................. 225
B.3 Introduction to Ethernet ............................................................................................................... 225
B.3.1 Basic Technologies ............................................................................................................. 225
B.3.2 Ethernet Frame Structure.................................................................................................... 226
B.4 Link Aggregation .......................................................................................................................... 227
B.4.1 Concepts ............................................................................................................................. 227
B.4.2 Characteristics .................................................................................................................... 227
B.5 Introduction to MPLS ................................................................................................................... 228
B.5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................. 228
B.5.2 Encapsulation Format ......................................................................................................... 229
B.6 QinQ Principle.............................................................................................................................. 229
B.6.1 Introduction to QinQ ............................................................................................................ 229
B.6.2 QinQ Data Frame Structure ................................................................................................ 230

C Glossary......................................................................................................................233
D Acronyms and Abbreviations....................................................................................239

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 10 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

1 Network Application

The OptiX OSN 1500 is new generation equipment developed by Huawei


Technologies Co., Ltd (hereinafter referred to as Huawei).
The OptiX OSN 1500 integrates the following technologies to transmit voice and data
services on the same platform with high efficiency:
 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
 Plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH)
 Wavelength division multiplexing (WDM)
 Ethernet
 Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)
 Storage area network (SAN)
 DVB (Digital Video Broadcasting)
 Digital data network (DDN)
 Automatically switched optical network (ASON)
There are two types of OptiX OSN 1500 system. Figure 1-1 shows the OptiX OSN
1500A and Figure 1-2 shows the OptiX OSN 1500B. The differences between the
OptiX OSN 1500A and the OptiX OSN 1500B lie in the appearance and access
capacity.

The different features of the OptiX OSN 1500A and the OptiX OSN 1500B are described in this
document. If the features are not described, they still remain the same.

Figure 1-1 OptiX OSN 1500A

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 11 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 1-2 OptiX OSN 1500B

The OptiX OSN 1500 is used at the access layer of a MAN. The OptiX OSN 1500 can
also be networked with the following equipment to optimize the investment and to
lower the networking costs for customers:
 OptiX OSN 9500
 OptiX OSN 7500
 OptiX OSN 3500
 OptiX OSN 3500T
 OptiX OSN 2500
 OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Figure 1-3 describes how the OptiX OSN 1500 NE is used in a transmission network.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 12 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 1-3 Network application of the OptiX OSN 1500


OptiX OSN 3500T OptiX OSN 9500
OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 7500

Backbone
layer

OptiX OSN 3500T


OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 3500

Convergence
layer

OptiX OSN 1500 OptiX OSN 2500

Access
layer

GSM/CDMA PSTN Ethernet ... ATM SAN

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)


Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Public Switched Telephony Network (PSTN)
Storage Area Network (SAN)
Ethernet

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 13 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

2 Function

2.1 Capacity
The capacity covers the cross-connect capacity and slot access capacity.

2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity


The CXL boards of different versions have different cross-connect capacity.
Table 2-1 lists the cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500.

Table 2-1 Cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500


Cross-Connect and Higher Order Lower Order Access Capacity
Timing Board Cross-Connect Cross-Connect of Single
Capacity Capacity Subrack

Q2CXL1, Q3CXL1, 20 Gbit/s (128 20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 15 Gbit/s (96 x 96


Q2CXL4, Q3CXL4, x 128 VC-4) VC-4, equivalent to VC-4)
Q2CXL16, Q3CXL16 384 x 384 VC-3 or
8064 x 8064 VC-12)
R1CXLL1, R1CXLD1, 15 Gbit/s (96 x 5 Gbit/s (32 x 32 10 Gbit/s (64 x 64
R1CXLQ1, R1CXLL4, 96 VC-4) VC-4, equivalent to VC-4)
R1CXLD4, R1CXLQ4, 96 x 96 VC-3 or
R1CXLL16 2016 x 2016 VC-12)

2.1.2 Slot Access Capacity


The OptiX OSN 1500A and the OptiX OSN 1500B have different slot access
capacities. Moreover, the access capacities depend on the cross-connect and timing
units.
If the cross-connect and timing units use the Q2/Q3CXL series boards, Figure 2-1
shows the access capacity of each slot in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 15 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 2-1 Access capacity of the slots in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack (Q2/Q3CXL)

XCS1A PIU
Slot Slot 11 PIU XCS B1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 6

Slot 2/12 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 7 1.25 Gbit/s


Slot20
Slot 3/13 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 8 1.25 Gbit/s
FAN
Slot 4 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 9 1.25 Gbit/s

Slot 5 2.5 Gbit/s Slot 10 AUX

If the cross-connect and timing units use the R1CXL series boards, Figure 2-2 shows
the access capacity of each slot in the OptiX OSN 1500A.

Figure 2-2 Access capacity of the slots in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack (R1CXL)

Slot 1 PIU Slot 11 PIU Slot 6 622Mbit/s

Slot 2 622Mbit/s Slot 12 1.25Gbit/s Slot 7 622Mbit/s


Slot 20
Slot 3 - Slot 13 1.25Gbit/s Slot 8 622Mbit/s

FAN
Slot 4 2.5Gbit/s Slot 9 AMU/EOW

Slot 5 2.5Gbit/s Slot 10 AUX

In the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, slot 12 and slot 13 can be divided into half-width
slots. Slot 12 can be divided into two half-width slots numbered slot 12 and slot 2, and
slot 13 can be divided into two half-width slots numbered slot 3 and slot 13.
In case the cross-connect and timing boards configured on the OptiX OSN 1500A are
the Q2/Q3CXL series boards:
 As full-width slots, slot 12 and slot 13 each have the access capacity of 2.5
Gbit/s.
 As half-width slots, slots 2, 3, 12 and 13 each have the access capacity of 1.25
Gbit/s.
In case the cross-connect and timing boards configured on the OptiX OSN 1500A are
the R1CXL series boards:
 As a full-width slot, slot 12 has the access capacity of 1.875 Gbit/s, and slot 13
has the access capacity of 1.25 Gbit/s.
 As half-width slots, slot 2, slot 12 and slot 13 can house boards. Slot 2 has the
access capacity of 622 Mbit/s, slot 12 and slot 13 each have the access capacity
of 1.25 Gbit/s.
If the cross-connect and timing units use the Q2/Q3CXL series boards, Figure 2-3
shows the access capacity of each slot in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 16 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 2-3 Access capacity of the slots in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack (Q2/Q3CXL)

Slot 14
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15

Slot 16
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17

Slot 1/11 2.5Gbit/s Slot 6 622Mbit/s

Slot 20 Slot 2/12 2.5Gbit/s Slot 7 622Mbit/s

Slot 3/13 2.5Gbit/s Slot 8 622Mbit/s


FAN Slot 4 Slot 9
2.5Gbit/s 622Mbit/s
Slot 5 2.5Gbit/s Slot 10 AUX

If the cross-connect and timing units use the R1CXL series boards, Figure 2-4 shows
the access capacity of each slot in the OptiX OSN 1500B.

Figure 2-4 Access capacity of the slots in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack (R1CXL)

Slot 14
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15

Slot 16
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17

Slot 1 - Slot 11 622Mbit/s Slot 6 622Mbit/s

Slot 20 Slot 2 - Slot 12 1.25Gbit/s Slot 7 622Mbit/s


Slot 3 - Slot 13 1.25Gbit/s Slot 8 622Mbit/s
FAN
Slot 4 2.5Gbit/s Slot 9 AMU/EOW

Slot 5 2.5Gbit/s Slot 10 AUX

In the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack, slot 11, slot 12 and slot 13 can be divided into
half-width slots. Slot 11 can be divided into two half-width slots numbered slot 1 and
slot 11; slot 12 can be divided into two half-width slots numbered slot 2 and slot 12;
and slot 13 can be divided into two half-width slots numbered slot 3 and slot 13.
In case the cross-connect and timing boards configured on the OptiX OSN 1500B are
the Q2/Q3CXL series boards:
 As full-width slots, slots 11–13 each have the access capacity of 2.5 Gbit/s.
 As six half-width slots, slots 1–3 and slots 11–13 each have the access capacity
of 1.25 Gbit/s.
If the cross-connect and timing boards configured on the OptiX OSN 1500B are the
R1CXL series boards:
 As a full-width slot, slot 11 has the access capacity of 622 Mbit/s, slot 12 and slot
13 each have the access capacity of 1.25 Gbit/s.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 17 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

 As half-width slots, slots 11-13 can house boards, and the access capacity of
each slot is the same as the access capacity of a full-width slot.

2.2 Service
The supported services are SDH services, PDH services and other services.

2.2.1 SDH Services


The OptiX OSN 1500 can process SDH services.
The OptiX OSN 1500 can process the following SDH services:
 Standard SDH services: STM-1/4/16
 Standard SDH concatenated services: VC-4-4c/VC-4-16c
 Standard SDH virtual concatenation services: VC4-Xv (X≤8), VC3-Xv (X≤24)
 SDH services with FEC: 2.666 Gbit/s

2.2.2 PDH Services


The OptiX OSN 1500 can process PDH services.
The OptiX OSN 1500 can process the following PDH services:
 E1/T1 service
 E3/T3 service
 E4 service

2.2.3 Ethernet Services


The OptiX OSN 1500 can process Ethernet services.
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides FE and GE interfaces to process the following Ethernet
services:
 Ethernet private line (EPL) service
 Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) service
 Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) service
 Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) service

2.2.4 RPR Services


The OptiX OSN 1500 provides FE and GE interfaces that support the resilient packet
ring (RPR).
The OptiX OSN 1500 can process the following RPR services:
 EVPL service
 EVPLAN service

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 18 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

2.2.5 ATM Services


The OptiX OSN 1500 can process ATM services.
The OptiX OSN 1500 can process the following ATM services:
 Constant bit rate (CBR) service
 Real-time variable bite rate (rt-VBR) service
 Non real-time variable bite rate (nrt-VBR) service
 Unspecified bit rate (UBR) service

2.2.6 DDN Services


The OptiX OSN 1500 can process DDN services.
The OptiX OSN 1500 can process the following DDN services:
 N x 64 kbit/s (N=1-31) service
 Framed E1 service

2.2.7 SAN Services


The OptiX OSN 1500 can process SAN services.
By using four independent multiservice access ports, the OptiX OSN 1500 can
process the following SAN services:
 Fiber channel (FC) service
 Fiber connection (FICON) service
 Enterprise systems connection (ESCON) service
 Digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface (DVB-ASI) service

2.2.8 Service Access Capacity


Configured with different quantity of different boards, the OptiX OSN 1500 can access
services of different capacities.
The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 1500 can access varies according to the
type and quantity of the configured boards. Table 2-2 lists the maximum capacity of
the OptiX OSN 1500 for accessing different services.

Table 2-2 Maximum service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500
Service Class Maximum Access Capacity

OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B


STM-16 standard or 4 5
concatenated services
STM-16 (FEC) services 2 3
STM-4 standard or concatenated 18 18
services
STM-1 standard services 42 54

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 19 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Service Class Maximum Access Capacity

OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B

STM-1 (electrical) services 4 18


E4 services - 8
E3/T3 services 6 27
E1/T1 services 64 190
FE services 32 56
GE services 8 12
STM-1 ATM services 8 12
STM-4 ATM services 2 3
ESCON services 8 12
FICON/FC100 services 4 6
FC200 services 2 3
DVB-ASI services 8 12
N x 64 kit/s services - 16
Framed E1 services - 16

2.3 Interface
The interfaces include service interfaces, administration and auxiliary interfaces.

2.3.1 Service Interfaces


Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces and PDH service interfaces.
Table 2-3 lists the service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 20 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Table 2-3 Service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500


Interface Description

SDH service STM-1 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors


interface STM-1 optical interfaces: I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
STM-4 optical interfaces: I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
STM-16 optical interfaces: I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je,
U-16.2Je (CXL16 does not provide L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je interfaces)
STM-16 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f
STM-16 optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692 can output fixed
wavelength from 191.1 THz to 196.0 THz.
PDH service 75/120-ohm E1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors
interface 100-ohm T1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors
75-ohm E3, T3 and E4 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors
Ethernet service 10/100Base-TX, 100Base-FX, 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX
interface
DDN service RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21, Framed E1
interface
ATM service STM-1 ATM optical interfaces: Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
interface STM-4 ATM optical interfaces: S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
E3 ATM interfaces: E3 ATM services are accessed by the N1PD3/N1PL3/PL3A
board
IMA E1 interfaces: IMA E1 services are accessed by the
N1PQ1/N1PQM/N2PQ1/R1PD1 board
Storage area FC100, FICON, FC200, ESCON, DVB-ASI service optical interfaces
network (SAN)
service interface

Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je, Ve-1.2, Ve-4.2 are technical
specifications defined by Huawei.

2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces


The equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces.
Table 2-4 lists the types of administration and auxiliary interfaces provided by the
OptiX OSN 1500.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 21 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Table 2-4 Administration and auxiliary interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500
Interface Type Description

Administration One remote maintenance interface (OAM)


Four broadcast data interfaces (S1–S4)
One Ethernet interface for network management (ETH)
One commissioning interface (COM)
Orderwire One orderwire phone interface (PHONE)
interface
Clock interface Two 75-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
Two 120-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
Alarm interface Three alarm input and one alarm output interface
Four cabinet alarm indicator output interfaces
Four cabinet alarm indicator concatenation input interfaces

2.4 Networking
The OptiX OSN 1500 can be used for several network topologies such as the ring
network and the chain network.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the separate and hybrid configuration of the following
types of NEs:
 Terminal multiplexer (TM)
 Add/drop multiplexer (ADM)
 Multiple add/drop multiplexer (MADM)
The OptiX OSN 1500 can be interconnected with Huawei OSN, DWDM, and Metro
equipment series, to provide a complete transmission network solution.

When the equipment is interconnecting, make sure that the K bytes to be received and
transmitted are on the same path at both ends.
 The OptiX OSN 1500 can be used with another OptiX OSN equipment to provide
a complete ASON solution. This solution covers all the layers including the
backbone layer, the convergence layer, and the access layer.
 Through an SDH interface or a GE interface, the OptiX 1500 can be
interconnected with the WDM equipment.
 Through an SDH, PDH, Ethernet, ATM, or DDN interface, the OptiX OSN 1500
can be interconnected with the OptiX Metro equipment.
Table 2-5 lists the networking modes supported by the OptiX OSN 1500.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 22 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Table 2-5 Basic networking modes of the OptiX OSN 1500


Networking Mode Topology

1 Chain

2 Ring

3 Tangent
rings

4 Intersecting
rings

5 Ring with
chain

6 DNI

7 Hub

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 23 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Networking Mode Topology

8 Mesh

MADM ADM TM ASON NE


Legends:

2.5 Built-in WDM Technology


The equipment supports the built-in WDM technology, which enables the transmission
of several wavelengths in one fiber.
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides a built-in WDM technology. The functions of the
equipment are as follows:
 Any four adjacent standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1
can be added or dropped.
 The optical terminal multiplexer (OTM) or the optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)
station that adds or drops four wavelengths is supported. Concatenation is
supported, and thus multiple waves can be added or dropped.
 The conversion between client-side signal wavelengths and ITU-T G.692
compliant standard wavelengths is supported. During the conversion, all the
signals are transparently transmitted.
 Intermediate ports are provided for expansion. When intermediate ports are
cascaded with other OADM boards, the expansion of add/drop channels is
realized.
 The 3R (regeneration, retiming and reshaping) functions are provided for
client-side uplink and downlink signals (at a rate of 34 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s). In the
case of these client-side signals, clock recovery is available, and the signal rate
can be monitored.
 Dual fed and selective receiving boards support intra-board protection. One
board of this type can be used to realize the optical channel protection, with the
protection switching time less than 50 ms.
 Single fed and single receiving boards support inter-board protection. A 1+1
inter-board standby scheme is supported, with the protection switching time less
than 50 ms.
 Supports standard CWDM wavelengths, which can be multiplexed or
demultiplexed.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 24 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

 Supports the remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA) system to transmit signals
over a long distance.
 Supports the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function.

2.6 External Clock Output Shutdown Function


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the external clock output shutdown function.
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the function of external clock output shutdown. The
users can use the T2000 to issue a command to the cross-connect board to shut
down or recover the two external T4 external clock outputs. In addition, the current
configuration status of the NE software can also be queried.
When the function is performed, no external clock signals are output. When the T2000
issues a command to disable the function, the software can recover the clock output.
By default, the external clock output shutdown function is not enabled. That is,
external clock signals are output by default.

2.7 110 V/220 V Power Supply


The equipment supports the input of 110 V or 220 V AC power supply. When DC
power supply is not available, the equipment can still be supplied with AC power.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the 110 V/220 V power supply through an
uninterrupted power module (UPM). The UPM is used to convert 110 V/220 V AC into
–48 V DC, and to provide power supply for the OptiX OSN 1500.
A UPM consists of two power boxes and one storage battery, and thus realizes the
protected power supply. The output power of each UPM is 2 x 270 W.
The dimensions of the power box are 438 mm (W) x 240 mm (D) x 44 mm (H).
The storage battery of the OptiX OSN 1500 has four 12 V-40 Ah battery cells, each of
which measures 197 mm (W) x 165 mm (D) x 170 mm (H). If the 110 V/220 V AC
power fails, the storage battery can provide power supply for four hours.

2.8 REG Function


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the board REG function.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the hybrid application of REG and ADM, as shown in
Figure 2-5.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 25 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 2-5 Hybrid application of ADM and REG


SL16 SL16
IN REG IN
SL16 SL16
OUT OUT
OUT OUT

IN IN

OptiX OSN 1500


IN OUT OUT IN

OUT IN IN OUT

SL16 SL16 SL16 SL16

ADM

For details on the boards that support REG, see Table 2-6.

Table 2-6 Boards that support the REG


Board Valid Slot Function

OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B

N2SL16, slot 12-13 slot 11-13 With the REG mode


N3SL16 enabled, the board is in
the RS loopback mode
N2SL16A, slot 12-13 slot 11-13 and only processes the
N3SL16A RSOH and the frame
headers.
NOTE
If the cross-connect and timing units use the R1CXL series boards, the OptiX OSN 1500 does
not support the preceding boards.

For the optical interface types of these boards, see Table 2-7.

Table 2-7 REG optical interfaces


Board Optical Interface Type

N2SL16, N3SL16 L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je


N2SL16A, N3SL16A I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 26 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

2.9 Protection
The equipment provides equipment level protection and network level protection.

2.9.1 Equipment Level Protection


The equipment level protection schemes include TPS protection and 1+1 protection.
Table 2-8 lists the equipment level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN
1500.

Table 2-8 Equipment level protection


Protected Object Protection Scheme Revertive Mode

OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B

E1/T1 processing board 1:1 TPS 1:N (N≤2) TPS Revertive


6 x E3/T3 processing board Not supported 1:1 TPS Revertive
4 x E4/STM-1 processing Not supported 1:1 TPS Revertive
board
Ethernet processing boards Not supported 1:1 TPS Revertive
N2EFS0 and N4EFS0
N x 64 kbit/s and framed E1 Not supported 1:N (N≤2) TPS Revertive
processing board
Ethernet processing boards 1+1 PPS and 1+1 BPS 1+1 PPS and 1+1 BPS Non-revertive
N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and
N3EGS4 DLAG DLAG  Revertive
(Default)
 Non-revertive
ATM IMA processing board 1+1 hot backup 1+1 hot backup Non-revertive
Cross-connect and timing 1+1 hot backup 1+1 hot backup Non-revertive
unit
SCC unit 1+1 hot backup 1+1 hot backup Non-revertive
–48 V power interface unit 1+1 hot backup 1+1 hot backup Non-revertive
+3.3 V board power supply 1:N backup 1:N backup Non-revertive

2.9.2 Network Level Protection


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports several network level protection schemes.
Table 2-9 lists the network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN
1500.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 27 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Table 2-9 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 1500
Network Level Protection Protection Scheme

SDH protection Linear MSP


MSP ring
Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP),
subnetwork connection multi-protection (SNCMP) and
subnetwork connection tunnel protection (SNCTP)
Dual-node interconnection (DNI) protection
Fiber-shared virtual trail protection
Optical-path-shared MSP
Ethernet protection Resilient packet ring (RPR) protection
ATM protection VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection

2.10 ASON Features


The OptiX OSN 1500 provides a set of stand-alone ASON software system to realize
the intelligent management of services and bandwidth resources.
The ASON features of the OptiX OSN 1500 are as follows:
 Supports automatic end-to-end service configuration.
 Supports service level agreement (SLA).
 Supports mesh networking and protection.
 Provides traffic engineering control to ensure load-balance traffic network wide
and improve the bandwidth availability.
 Provides distributed mesh network protection including real-time rerouting and
pre-configuration.
 Supports span protection and end-to-end service protection, improving the
scalability of the network.
 Provides ASON clock tracing.

The intelligent software system can be bundled with or separated from the OptiX OSN 1500
according to the requirement. If not equipped with the intelligent software system, the OptiX
OSN 1500 does not support the intelligent features described in this manual.

2.11 TCM
The tandem connection monitor (TCM) is a method used to monitor bit errors.
If a VC-4 passes through several networks, the TCM method can be used to monitor
the bit errors of each section.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 28 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

The R1CXL, N2SL16, N3SL16, N2SL16A, N3SL16A, N2SL4, N2SLD4, N2SLQ4,


N2SL1, N2SLQ1 and N2SLO1 boards support the TCM at the VC-4 level.

2.12 E13/M13 Function


The E13/M13 function is performed to multiplex 16 x E1/21 x T1 signals into one
E3/T3 signal or to demultiplex one E3/T3 signal to 16 x E1/21 x T1 signals. The OptiX
OSN 1500 supports the E13/M13 function.
The E13/M13 function has two modes: Transmux and Transmux Server.
These two modes are described as follows:
 The remote NE transmits the E1/E3 or T1/T3 services in VC-12/VC-3
granularities to the central NE over the SDH line.
 The central NE disassembles the received services into E1/T1 granularities.
− For E1/T1 services, the central NE directly demaps VC-12 signals into E1/T1
signals.
− For E3/T3 services, the central NE first demaps VC-3 signals into E3/T3
signals. Then, the E13/M13 function is performed to demultiplex E3/T3 signals
into E1/T1 signals.
 The central NE first grooms E1/T1 signals, and then by using the E13/M13
function, aggregates and reassembles these E1/T1 signals to E3/T3 signals.
Then, the E3/T3 signals are output.
− If the reassembled E3/T3 signals are output to the local application equipment
through electrical interfaces, the mode is referred to as the Transmux mode.
− If the reassembled E3/T3 signals are output to anoother transmission
equipment over the SDH line, the mode is referred to as the Transmux Server
mode.

2.13 RPR
The RPR is suitable for ring topology and is used to quickly restore services from a
fiber cut or a link failure.
The main features of the RPR are as follows:
 Provide the topology auto-discovery function to reflect the network status in real
time.
 Support fairness algorithm by configurable weight and support five service levels.
 Support a maximum of 255 nodes in the ring network and support stripping at the
destination node.
 Solve the fairness and congestion control problems.
 Provide RPR protection.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 29 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

2.14 ETH-OAM
The ETH-OAM function enhances the method of performing Ethernet Layer 2
maintenance. It can be implemented to verify service connectivity, commission
deployed services, locate network faults, and so on.
For the OptiX OSN 1500, Ethernet service processing boards provide the ETH-OAM
function, which complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah. The ETH-OAM
function provides a complete ETH-OAM solution to automatically detect and locate
faults.
The IEEE 802.1ag ETH-OAM is realized through the following methods:
 The loopback (LB) test, which is used for a bidirectional continuity check.
 The link trace (LT) test, which is used to locate the faulty point.
 The continuity check (CC), which is used for a unidirectional continuity check.
 OAM_Ping test, which is used to test the packet loss ratio and latency in service.
The IEEE 802.3ah ETH-OAM function is realized through the following methods:
 Automatic OAM Discovery, which is used to obtain the capability for the opposite
end to support the IEEE 802.3ah OAM protocol.
 Link performance monitoring, which is used to monitor the bit error performance
of the link.
 Fault detection, which is used to report a fault to the opposite end.
 Remote loopback, which is used to locate a fault and test the link performance.
 Self-loop check, which is used to check the self-loop port.
 Loop shutdown, which is used to block a self-loop port and rectify a port loop.

2.15 Software Package Loading


The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the software package loading function.
The software package loading function supports mass loading of software at NE-level
and diffused loading of software at network-level. This function realizes upgrade and
management of NE software, simplifies the upgrade operations, and improves the
usability of the upgrade operations.
The software package loading has the following features:
 Users load the software in a uniform operation interface.
 The complete software package is stored on the compact flash (CF) card of the
Q3CXL/R1CXL board. If the board software files are lost, these files can be
restored from the Q3CXL/R1CXL board.
 The automatic matching and loading of software package is supported. If the
software version of the in-service board does not match the software package,
the board software will be automatically updated.
 The software package loading is an incremental scheme and is performed to load
the files required in the current update.
 The network-level diffused loading feature realizes the synchronous software
package loading on the NEs in the entire network. These NEs are configured with
the same series of SCC boards.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 30 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

The software package loading is applied in the following scenarios:


 Upgrade of software of an NE
 Replacement of service boards
 Replacement of auxiliary boards
 Replacement of the Q3CXL or R1CXL board
 Replacement of the CF card of the Q3CXL or R1CXL board

2.16 Hot Patch


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the hot patch technology.
Some equipment requires long-term uninterrupted operation. When a defect is located
or a new requirement needs to be applied to the equipment software, a process of
replacing old codes with new codes should be performed to rectify the defect or
realize the new requirement, without any service interruption. These new codes are
referred to as a hot patch.
The hot patch technology has the following features:
 The hot patch solves most of the software problems without affecting services.
 The hot patch effectively decreases the number of software versions and
prevents frequent software version upgrade.
 The hot patch operation does not affect services and can be performed remotely.
The hot patch also provides a rollback function. This helps to decrease the
upgrade cost and to avoid upgrade risks.
 The hot patch can be used as an effective method for locating faults, and thus
improves the efficiency of solving problems.

2.17 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the suppression of tributary/data board alarms that
are raised as a result of the alarms on the line board.
When there are cross-connections between a line board and a tributary/data board,
many alarms are raised on the tributary/data board if alarms are raised on the line
board. These alarms are all reported to the T2000. Such a large number of alarms can
disturb the troubleshooting and affect the problem solution efficiency. Therefore, the
inter-board alarm suppression function is used to solve this problem.
If there are services from the line board to the tributary/data board in the same NE,
and if higher order alarms are raised on the line board, relevant lower order alarms on
the tributary/data board are suppressed.
If alarms are relevant to the tributary/data board only (which means the line board at
the service source does not generate higher order alarms), the alarms on the
tributary/data board are not suppressed. In this case, these alarms are reported to the
T2000 and are not mistakenly suppressed.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 31 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

2.18 PRBS Function


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test
function.
The PRBS function is mainly used for network self-test and maintenance. An NE that
provides the PRBS function can work as a simple device used to analyze if a service
path is faulty. Such analysis can be performed for the NE and the entire network.
During deployment or troubleshooting, the PRBS function realizes the test without a
real test device.
The PRBS function has the following two types:
 If the PRBS function is used for lower order services, the PRBS module is
integrated on a tributary board.
 If the PRBS function is used for higher order services, the PRBS module is
integrated on a line board or a cross-connect board.
The PRBS function is implemented in the following process:
 For the opposite tributary or line of a path to be tested, the user issues a loopback
command on the T2000.
 On the T2000, the user issues a command to enable the PRBS function for this
path.
 The tributary, line, or cross-connect board performs the PRBS function and starts
the statistics.
 The tributary, line, or cross-connect board reports the PRBS test result.
 The user queries the PRBS statistics result.
 The user releases the loopback of the path on the opposite tributary or line board.

2.19 Board Version Replacement


The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new
version board. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new
version board are consistent with the configuration and service status of the old
version board.
This function provides a flexible board replacement scheme, and thus reduces the
equipment cost and the maintenance cost.
For OptiX OSN 1500, the board version replacement function is supported by the
N3SL16, N3SL16A, R2PD1, N2PQ1, N2PD3, N2PL3, N2PL3A, N2EFS0, N4EFS0,
N2EGS2 and N2EFS4.
For detailed replacement relations of boards that support this function, refer to the
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Troubleshooting.
When using the board version replacement function, note the following points:
 The new board may not support the functions of the original board. Before the
replacement, fully consider the difference of functions of the two boards. For
example, if an N2 version line board is used to replace an N1 version line board,
AU-3 services and TCM function cannot be configured on the N2 version line
board.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 32 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

 The line board to be replaced cannot have an optical-path-shared MSP


configured.

2.20 DCC Transparent Transmission Through External


Clock Interfaces
The OptiX OSN 1500 can use external clock interfaces to transparently transmit data
communication channel (DCC) information.
The Q3CXL and R1CXL boards, can provide two 2 Mbit/s external clock interfaces to
transmit DCC information. If this function is enabled, you should connect the external
clock interface to the interface board corresponding to a tributary board, by using a
cable. In this case, after DCC overhead signals enter the Q3CXL/R1CXL board, these
signals are further sent, through this tributary board, into the cross-connect unit of the
Q3CXL/R1CXL board. After being bound with service information, the signals are sent
to any optical interface or 2 Mbit/s electrical interface for transmission. At the receive
end, when the optical interface or 2 Mbit/s electrical interface receives the service that
is transmitted in the aforementioned way, the receiving interface is able to extract
DCC information by enabling the same function.
If there is a third-party network between networks composed of Huawei equipment,
the T2000 is able to manage a remote Huawei network by using the DCC transparent
transmission (through external clock interfaces) function.
As shown in Figure 2-6, the T2000 is connected to an NE in Huawei network A, and
hence is able to manage Huawei network A. Huawei networks A, B and C are
connected to a third-party network through NE1, NE2 and NE3 respectively. As the
third-party network is in between, the T2000 cannot obtain network management
information from Huawei networks B and C. If the DCC transparent transmission
(through external clock interfaces) function is enabled on NE1, NE2 and NE3,
however, the T2000 is able to manage Huawei networks B and C.

To enable the DCC transparent transmission (through external clock interfaces) function, the
setting is required on only the NEs that are connected to the third-party network.
 On NE2 and NE3 that are respectively located in Huawei networks B and C, the
DCC information in the overhead bus is sent from the external clock interface to
the tributary board. After cross-connect grooming, the DCC information is sent,
together with the service, through an optical interface (or a 2 Mbit/s electrical
interface) for transmission.
 On NE1 in Huawei network A, when the optical interface (or the 2 Mbit/s electrical
interface) receives service data transparently transmitted through the third-party
network, the DCC information is extracted, and is then sent through the tributary
board to the external clock interface. At last, the DCC information returns to the
overhead bus.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 33 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 2-6 Application of DCC transparent transmission through external clock interfaces
iManager T2000

External clock interface

Optical interface or 2 Mbit/s


DCC
External clock interface electrical interface
Third-party
network
Optical interface or 2 Mbit/s
1 Huawei
electrical interface
network A
DCC
2
Huawei
network B External clock interface

Optical interface or 2 Mbit/s


3
electrical interface
Huawei
network C

2.21 NSF Function


The non-interrupted service forwarding (NSF) function is supported by the N4EFS0
and N2EFS4 boards. With the NSF function, services are not interrupted during an
upgrade of the board software and network processor (NP) software.
In the NSF mode, the upgrade of the board software and NP software for the N4EFS0
and N2EFS4 boards can be completed after performing a warm reset of the boards. In
this case, the service interruption time is less than 50 ms, which meets the
carrier-class requirements.

If the two versions before and after the upgrade have significant differences, the
service interruption during the NSF-mode upgrade cannot be controlled within 50 ms,
and this ensures only a low service interruption time.

2.22 OAM Information Interworking


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports OAM information interworking.
Any of the following methods can be adopted for the OptiX OSN 1500 to transparently
transmit the OAM information of the third-party equipment, or for the third-party
equipment to transparently transmit the OAM information of the OptiX OSN 1500.
 HWECC

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 34 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

 IP over DCC
 OSI over DCC
 DCC transparent transmission through 2 Mbit/s external clock interfaces

2.23 Clock
The OptiX 1500 supports the clock functions.
 SSM clock protocol
 Tributary retiming
 Two 75-ohm/120-ohm external clock output and input
 Line clock source
 Tributary clock source
 Three working modes are as follows:
− Tracing mode
− Holdover mode
− Free-run mode
 ASON clock tracing

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 35 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

3 Hardware

3.1 Overview
The OptiX OSN 1500 can be installed in an ETSI cabinet (300 mm or 600 mm deep)
or a 19-inch standard cabinet. It can also be installed against the wall.

3.2 Cabinet
The OptiX OSN 1500 can be installed in an ETSI cabinet (300 mm or 600 mm deep)
or a 19-inch standard cabinet.
Figure 3-1 shows an ETSI cabinet that is 300 mm deep.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 37 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 3-1 Appearance of an ETSI cabinet

W D

Table 3-1 lists the technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets.

Table 3-1 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets


Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) 55


600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H) 79
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H) 60
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) 84
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600 (H) 70

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 38 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600 (H) 94


NOTE
All dimensions are in mm. The following figure shows the dimensions of the width, the depth
and the height.
H

W
D

Table 3-2 lists the technical specifications of the 19-inch standard cabinets.

Table 3-2 Technical specifications of the 19-inch standard cabinets


Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) 90


600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) 110

3.3 OptiX OSN 1500A Subrack


The subrack of the OptiX OSN 1500A consists of slots and boards that can be
configured.

3.3.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 1500A subrack is of a one-layer structure. The subrack consists of the
slot area for boards, power supply area, fan area and fiber routing area.
Figure 3-2 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 39 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 3-2 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack

2
3

H
4
6 W
D
5

1. Fan area 2. Processing board area 3. Power supply area


4. Processing board area 5. Fiber routing area 6. Ear bracket

The functions of each subrack area are as follows:


 Slot area for boards: This area is used to house the boards for the OptiX OSN
1500A.
 Fan area: This area is used to house one fan module, which dissipates the heat
generated by the equipment.
 Power supply area: This area is used to house two PIU boards, which are used to
supply power for the equipment.
 Fiber routing area: This area is used to route fibers and cables in the subrack.

3.3.2 Slot Allocation


The OptiX OSN 1500A subrack has only one layer, where 12 slots are available
before the division of slots.
Figure 3-3 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.

Figure 3-3 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack

Slot 1 Slot 11 Slot 6

Slot 20 Slot 12 Slot 7


Slot 13 Slot 8
FAN Slot 4 CXL Slot 9 EOW
Slot 5 CXL Slot 10 AUX

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 40 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Slots 12 and 13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack can be divided into two half-width
slots. See Figure 3-4.

Figure 3-4 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack after the division of slots

Slot 1 Slot 11 Slot 6

Slot 20 Slot 2 Slot 12 Slot 7


Slot 3 Slot 13 Slot 8
FAN Slot 4 CXL Slot 9 EOW
Slot 5 CXL Slot 10 AUX

The slots in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack are allocated as follows:
 Slots for integrated boards of the line, SCC, cross-connect and timing units: slots
4–5
 Slots for processing boards before the division of slots: slots 6–9 and 12–13
 Slots for processing boards after the division of slots: slots 6–9, 12–13, and 2–3
 Slot for the orderwire board: slot 9 (also for the processing board)
 Slot for the auxiliary interface board: slot 10
 Slots for PIU boards: slots 1 and 11
 Slots for the fan board: slot 20

Mapping Relation Between Slots for Interface Boards and Slots for Processing
Boards
Table 3-3 lists the mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for
the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A.

Table 3-3 Mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the
processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Slots for Processing Boards Slots for Interface Boards

Slot 12 Slots 6 and 7

Boards and Their Valid Slots


Table 3-4 lists the CXL series boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A.

Table 3-4 CXL series boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board Full Name Valid Slots

Q2CXL16, Q3CXL16 1 x STM-16 integrated board of the SCC, Slots 4 and 5


cross-connect, timing and line units
R1CXLL16 1 x STM-16 integrated board of the SCC, Slots 4 and 5
cross-connect, timing and line units

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 41 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Board Full Name Valid Slots

Q2CXL4, Q3CXL4 1 x STM-4 integrated board of the SCC, Slots 4 and 5


cross-connect, timing and line units
R1CXLL4 1 x STM-4 integrated board of the SCC, Slots 4 and 5
cross-connect, timing and line units
R1CXLD4 2 x STM-4 integrated board of the SCC, Slots 4 and 5
cross-connect, timing and line units
R1CXLQ4 4 x STM-4 integrated board of the SCC, Slots 4 and 5
cross-connect, timing and line units
Q2CXL1, Q3CXL1 1 x STM-1 integrated board of the SCC, Slots 4 and 5
cross-connect, timing and line units
R1CXLL1 1 x STM-1 integrated board of the SCC, Slots 4 and 5
cross-connect, timing and line units
R1CXLD1 2 x STM-1 integrated board of the SCC, Slots 4 and 5
cross-connect, timing and line units
R1CXLQ1 4 x STM-1 integrated board of the SCC, Slots 4 and 5
cross-connect, timing and line units
NOTE
a: The CXL is a board that integrates the SCC, cross-connect, timing, and line units for the OptiX OSN 1500A. It is
one physical board and can be housed in slot 4 or slot 5 on the subrack. On the T2000, the Q2/Q3CXL is displayed
as ECXL, GSCC and SL1/SL4/SL16, and the R1CXL is displayed as RCXL, GSCC and SLN/SLD41/SLQ41, seated
in the logical slots 80–81, 82–83 and 4–5.

Table 3-5 lists the SDH processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN
1500A.

Table 3-5 SDH processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1SL16, N2SL16, 1 x STM-16 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect
N3SL16 capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 12 and 13
If the cross-connect capacity is 15
Gbit/s, these slots are unavailable.
N1SL16A, 1 x STM-16 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect
N2SL16A, N3SL16A capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 12 and 13.
If the cross-connect capacity is 15
Gbit/s, these slots are unavailable.
N1SF16 1 x STM-16 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect
(with FEC) capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 12 and 13
If the cross-connect capacity is 15
Gbit/s, these slots are unavailable.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 42 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1SLQ4, N2SLQ4, 4 x STM-4 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect
N1SLQ4A capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 12 and 13
If the cross-connect capacity is 15
Gbit/s, these slots are unavailable.
N1SLD4, N1SLD4A, 2 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13
N2SLD4
R1SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect
(half-width) capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 2–3, 6–9, and
12–13
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slots 12–13
N1SL4, N1SL4A, 1 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13
N2SL4
R1SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect
(half-width) capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot 2-3, 6-9, 12-13
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 2, 6-8, 12-13
N1SLT1 12 x STM-1 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 12 and 13
If the cross-connect capacity is 15
Gbit/s, these slots are unavailable.
N2SLO1 8 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13
N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A, 4 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13
N2SLQ1
R1SLQ1 4 x STM-1 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect
(half-width) capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot 2-3, 6-9, 12-13
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 2, 6-8, 12-13
N1SL1, N1SL1A, 1 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13
N2SL1
R1SL1 1 x STM-1 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect
(half-width) capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot 2-3, 6-9, 12-13
Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 2, 6-8, 12-13
N1SEP1 2 x STM-1 line processing board Slots 12 and 13

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 43 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Table 3-6 lists the PDH processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN
1500A.

Table 3-6 PDH processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1PL3A (not used 3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13


with the interface
board)
N2PL3A (not used 3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13
with the interface
board)
R1PD1(A/B) 32 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm Slots 2 and 12
processing board (half-width)
R2PD1(A/B) 32 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm Slots 2 and 12
processing board (half-width )
R1PL1(A/B) 16 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm Valid slots when the
processing board (half-width) cross-connect capacity is 20
Gbit/s: slot 6-9
Valid slots when the
cross-connect capacity is 15
Gbit/s: slot 6-8
N1DXA DDN service convergence Slots 12 and 13
and processing board

Table 3-7 lists the interface boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A.

Table 3-7 Interface Boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board Full Name Valid Slots

R1L75S 16 x EI 75-ohm interface Slots 6 and 7


board (half-width)
R1L12S 16 x E1 120-ohm interface Slots 6 and 7
board (half-width)

Table 3-8 lists the data processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN
1500A.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 44 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Table 3-8 Data processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1EMS4 4 x GE Ethernet processing Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20


board with Lanswitch Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 15
Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N2EGS2 2 x GE Ethernet processing Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20
board with Lanswitch Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 15
Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EGS4 4 x GE Ethernet processing Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20
board with Lanswitch Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 15
Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N3EGS4 4 x GE Ethernet processing Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20
board with Lanswitch Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 15
Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EGT2 2 x GE Ethernet transparent Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20
transmission board Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 15
Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EFS4 4 x FE Ethernet processing Slots 12 and 13
board with Lanswitch
N2EFS4 4 x FE Ethernet processing Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
board with Lanswitch
R1EFT4 4 x FE Ethernet transparent Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20
transmission board Gbit/s: slot 2–3, 6–9 and 12–13 (622 Mbit/s)
(half-width) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 15
Gbit/s: slot 2, 6–8 and 12–13 (622 Mbit/s)
N1EFT8 (not 8 x FE Ethernet transparent Slots 12–13 (622 Mbit/s)
used with the transmission board
interface
board)
N1EFT8A 8 x FE transparent Slots 12 and 13 (622 Mbit/s)
transmission board
(interfaces are available on
the front panel)
N2EGR2 2 x GE Ethernet ring Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20
processing board Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 15
Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 45 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N2EMR0 (not 1 x GE and 4 x FE Ethernet Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20
used with the processing board Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
interface Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 15
board) Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1ADL4 1 x STM-4 ATM processing Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
board
N1ADQ1 4 x STM-1 ATM processing Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
board
N1IDL4 1 x STM-4 IMA processing Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
board
N1IDQ1 4 x STM-1 IMA processing Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
board
N1MST4 4-channel multiservice (SAN Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20
or video service) transparent Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
transmission board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 15
Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

Table 3-9 lists the WDM boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A.

Table 3-9 WDM boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1LWX Arbitrary rate access board Slots 12 and 13


TN11OBU1 Optical booster amplifier board Slots 12 and 13
N1FIB Filter isolating board Slots 12 and 13
N1MR2A Arbitrary two-wavelength add/drop board (processing Slots 12 and 13
board)
N1MR2B Arbitrary two-wavelength add/drop board (half-width) slot 2-3, 6–9 and 12–13 (622
Mbit/s)
TN11MR2 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board Slots 12 and 13
TN11MR4 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board Slots 12 and 13
TN11CMR2 2-channel CWDM optical add/drop multiplexing board Slots 12 and 13
TN11CMR4 4-channel CWDM optical add/drop multiplexing board Slots 12 and 13

Table 3-10 lists the optical booster amplifier boards and their valid slots of the OptiX
OSN 1500A.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 46 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Table 3-10 Optical booster amplifier boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1BA2 2-channel optical booster amplifier board Slots 12 and 13


N1BPA, N2BPA 1-channel amplifier and 1-channel Slots 12 and 13
preamplifier board
61COA, 62COA, COA board Slots 101 and 102
N1COA
ROP Single wavelength long-haul board Slot 103 (external)
(remote pumping)

Table 3-11 lists the auxiliary boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A.

Table 3-11 Auxiliary boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board Full Name Valid Slots

R1AMU Orderwire processing or alarm Slot 9


concatenation board
R1AUX System auxiliary processing unit Slot 10
R2AUX System auxiliary processing unit Slot 10
R1PIUA PIU board Slots 1 and 11
R1FAN Fan board Slot 20
R1EOW Orderwire communication board Slot 9
UPMa Uninterruptable power module Slot 50
a: The UPM is in case shape. On the T2000, it is displayed as CAU board seated in the logical slot
50.

3.3.3 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the subrack provide the dimensions and weight.
Table 3-12 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.

Table 3-12 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack


Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)

444 (W) x 262 (D) x 131 (H) 8 (with the backplane, fan and two PIU boards)

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 47 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

3.4 OptiX OSN 1500B Subrack


The subrack of the OptiX OSN 1500B consists of slots and boards that can be
configured.

3.4.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 1500B subrack is of a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the
slot area for processing boards, slot area for interface boards, slot area for the
auxiliary interface board, power supply area and fan area.
Figure 3-5 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.

Figure 3-5 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack

2
3

H
5
7 W
D
6

1. Interface board area 2. Power supply area 3. Fan area 4. Processing board area
5. Processing board area 6. Fiber routing area 7. Ear bracket

The functions of each subrack area are as follows:


 Slot area for interface boards: This area is used to house the tributary interface
boards and Ethernet interface boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
 Slot area for processing boards: This area is used to house the line, tributary and
Ethernet processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
 Fan area: This area is used to house one fan module, which dissipates the heat
generated by the equipment.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 48 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

 Slot area for the auxiliary interface board: This area is used to house the auxiliary
interface board, which provides alarm interfaces, orderwire phone interface,
management and maintenance interface, and clock interface.
 Power supply area: This area is used to house two PIU boards, which are used to
supply power for the equipment.
 Fiber routing area: This area is used to route fibers and cables in the subrack.

3.4.2 Slot Allocation


The OptiX OSN 1500B subrack has two layers. The upper layer of the subrack, where
four slots are present, is the slot area for the interface boards and PIU boards. The
lower layer of the subrack, where ten slots are available before the division of slots
(including slots 4 and 5), is the slot area for the processing boards and auxiliary
boards.
Figure 3-6 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.

Figure 3-6 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack

Slot 14
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17
Slot 11 Slot 6

Slot 20 Slot 12 Slot 7


Slot 13 Slot 8
FAN Slot 4 CXL Slot 9 EOW
Slot 5 CXL Slot 10 AUX

Slots 11-13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack can be divided. As shown in Figure 3-7,
the divided slots are in the dashed area. The slots in the left portion of the original
slots are slots 1-3, and the slots in the right portion of the original slots are slots 11-13.

Figure 3-7 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack (after the division of slots)
Slot 14
Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 17
Slot 1 Slot 11 Slot 6

Slot 20 Slot 2 Slot 12 Slot 7


Slot 3 Slot 13 Slot 8
FAN Slot 4 CXL Slot 9 EOW
Slot 5 CXL Slot 10 AUX

The slots in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack are allocated as follows:
 Slots for integrated boards of the line, SCC, cross-connect and timing units: slots
4-5

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 49 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

 Slots for processing boards before the division of slots: slots 6-9 and 11-13
 Slots for processing boards after the division of slots: slots 1-9 and 11-13
 Slots for the interface boards: slots 14-17
 Slot for the orderwire board: slot 9 (also for the processing board)
 Slot for the auxiliary interface board: slot 10
 Slots for PIU boards: slots 18 and 19
 Slot for the fan board: slot 20

Mapping Relation Between Slots for Interface Boards and Slots for Processing
Boards
Table 3-13 lists the mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots
for the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B.

Table 3-13 Mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the
processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Slots for Slots for Interface Slots for Slots for Interface
Processing Boards Processing Boards
Boards Boards

Slot 2 Slot 14 Slot 3 Slot 16


Slot 7 Slot 15 Slot 8 Slot 17
Slot 12 Slots 14 and 15 Slot 13 Slots 16 and 17

The corresponding interface boards of the PD3, PL3, SEP, and SPQ4 can be housed
only in slots of even numbers.
For the OptiX OSN 1500B, the boards housed in slots 12 and 7 share the same
interface board housed in slot 15, and the boards housed in slots 13 and 8 share the
same interface board housed in slot 17. Therefore, when you configure the boards,
ensure the following:
 If slot 12 houses the N1EMS4 (used with an interface board) or R1PD1, slot 7
cannot house any board used with an interface board.
 If slot 13 houses the N1EMS4 (used with an interface board) or R1PD1, slot 8
cannot house any board used with an interface board.

Boards and Their Valid Slots


Table 3-14 lists the CXL series boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B.

Table 3-14 CXL series boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Full Name Valid Slots

Q2CXL16, 1 x STM-16 integrated board of the SCC, Slots 4 and 5


Q3CXL16 cross-connect, timing and line units

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 50 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Board Full Name Valid Slots

R1CXLL16 1 x STM-16 integrated board of the SCC, Slots 4 and 5


cross-connect, timing and line units
Q2CXL4, 1 x STM-4 integrated board of the SCC, Slots 4 and 5
Q3CXL4 cross-connect, timing and line units
R1CXLL4 1 x STM-4 integrated board of the SCC, Slots 4 and 5
cross-connect, timing and line units
R1CXLD4 2 x STM-4 integrated board of the SCC, Slots 4 and 5
cross-connect, timing and line units
R1CXLQ4 4 x STM-4 integrated board of the SCC, Slots 4 and 5
cross-connect, timing and line units
Q2CXL1, 1 x STM-1 integrated board of the SCC, Slots 4 and 5
Q3CXL1 cross-connect, timing and line units
R1CXLL1 1 x STM-1 integrated board of the SCC, Slots 4 and 5
cross-connect, timing and line units
R1CXLD1 2 x STM-1 integrated board of the SCC, Slots 4 and 5
cross-connect, timing and line units
R1CXLQ1 4 x STM-1 integrated board of the SCC, Slots 4 and 5
cross-connect, timing and line units
NOTE
a: The CXL is a board that integrates the SCC, cross-connect, timing, and line units for the
OptiX OSN 1500B. It is one physical board and can be housed in slot 4 or slot 5 on the subrack.
On the T2000, the Q2/Q3CXL is displayed as ECXL, GSCC and SL1/SL4/SL16, and the R1CXL
is displayed as RCXL, GSCC and SLN/SLD41/SLQ41, seated in the logical slots 80–81, 82–83
and 4–5.

Table 3-15 lists the SDH processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN
1500B.

Table 3-15 SDH processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Full Name Valid Slots
N1SL16, N2SL16, 1 x STM-16 optical Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20
N3SL16 interface board Gbit/s: slots 11-13
If the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s, these
slots are unavailable.
N1SL16A, N2SL16A, 1 x STM-16 optical Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20
N3SL16A interface board Gbit/s: slots 11-13
If the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s, these
slots are unavailable.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 51 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1SF16 1 x STM-16 outband Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20


optical interface board Gbit/s: slots 11-13
(with FEC) If the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s, these
slots are unavailable.
N1SLQ4, N1SLQ4A, 4 x STM-4 optical Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20
N2SLQ4 interface board Gbit/s: slots 11-13
If the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s, these
slots are unavailable.
N1SLD4, N2SLD4A, 2 x STM-4 optical Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20
N2SLD4 interface board Gbit/s: slots 11-13
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15
Gbit/s: slots 12-13
N1SL4, N1SL4A, 1 x STM-4 optical Slots 11-13
N2SL4 interface board
R1SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20
interface board Gbit/s: slots 1-3, 11-13 (up to two optical
(half-width) interfaces can be configured), slots 6-9 (one
optical interfaces can be configured).
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15
Gbit/s: slot 11 (one optical interfaces can be
configured), slots 12-13 (up to two optical
interfaces can be configured).
R1SL4 1 x STM-4 optical Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20
interface board Gbit/s: slots 1-3, 6-9, 11-13
(half-width) Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15
Gbit/s: slots 6-8, 11-13
N1SLT1 12 x STM-1 optical Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20
interface board Gbit/s: slots 11-13
If the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s, these
slots are unavailable.
N2SLO1 8 x AU-3 high density Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20
access board Gbit/s: slots 11-13
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15
Gbit/s: slots 12-13
N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A, 4 x STM-1 optical Slots 11-13
N2SLQ1 interface board
N1SL1, N1SL1A, 1 x STM-1 optical Slots 11-13
N2SL1 interface board
R1SLQ1 4 x STM-1 optical Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20
interface board Gbit/s: slots 1-3, 6-9, 11-13
(half-width) Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15
Gbit/s: slots 6-8, 11-13

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 52 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Board Full Name Valid Slots

R1SL1 1 x STM-1 optical Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20


interface board Gbit/s: slots 1-3, 6-9, 11-13
(half-width) Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15
Gbit/s: slots 6-8, 11-13
N1SEP (used with 8 x STM-1 (e) processing Slots 12–13
the interface board)a board
N1SEP1 (not used 2 x STM-1 (e) processing Slots 11–13
with the interface board
board)a
a: The SEP1 board is displayed as the SEP1 or SEP on the T2000, depending on the interfacing mode of the board.
When the SEP1 provides interfaces on the front panel, it is displayed as the SEP1 on the T2000. When the SEP1 is used
with an interface board, it is displayed as the SEP on the T2000.

Table 3-16 lists the PDH processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN
1500B.

Table 3-16 PDH processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1SPQ4 4 x E4/STM-1 processing board Slots 12 and 13


N2SPQ4 (used with 4 x E4/STM-1 processing board Slots 12 and 13
the interface board)
R1PL1(A/B) (interfaces 16 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm interface Slots 6–9
available on the front and processing board
panel)
N2PQ3 12 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13
N1PD3 6 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13
N2PD3 6 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13
N2PL3 3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13
N1PL3A (not used with 3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 11–13
the interface board)
N2PL3A (not used with 3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 11–13
the interface board)
N1PL3 3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13
N1PQ1(A/B) 63 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm processing Slots 11–13
board
N2PQ1(A/B) 63 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm processing Slots 11–13
board

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 53 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Board Full Name Valid Slots

R1PD1(A/B) 32 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm processing Valid slots if the cross-connect


board (half-width) capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 1-3, 6-8,
11-13
Valid slots if the cross-connect
capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slots 6-8,
11-13
R2PD1(A/B) 32 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm processing Valid slots if the cross-connect
board (half-width) capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 1-3, 6-8,
11-13
Valid slots if the cross-connect
capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slots 6-8,
11-13
N1PQM 63 x E1/T1 processing board Slots 11–13
N1DX1 DDN service access and Slots 11-13
convergence board
N1DXA DDN service convergence and Slots 11-13
processing board

Table 3-17 lists the interface boards or protection switching boards and their valid slots
for the OptiX OSN 1500B.

Table 3-17 Interface/protection switching boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN
1500B
Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1EU08 8 x STM-1 (e) electrical Slots 14 and 16


interface board
N1OU08 8 x STM-1 optical interface Slots 14 and 16
board
N2OU08 8 x STM-1 optical interface Slots 14 and 16
board
N1EU04 4 x STM-1 (e) electrical Slots 14 and 16
interface board
N1MU04 4 x E4/STM-1 interface board Slots 14 and 16
N1C34S 3 x 34M/45M electrical Slots 14 and 16
interface switching board
N1D34S 6 x 34M/45M electrical Slots 14–17
interface switching board
N1D75S 32 x E1/T1 75-ohm electrical Slots 14-17
interface switching board

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 54 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1D12S 32 x E1/T1 120-ohm electrical Slots 14-17


interface switching board
N1D12B 32 x E1/T1 120-ohm electrical Slots 14-17
interface board
N1DM12 DDN service interface board Slots 14-17
N1TSB8 8-channel electrical interface Slots 14 and 15
switching board
N1TSB4 4-channel electrical interface Slot 14
switching board
N1ETF8 8 x FE Ethernet electrical Slots 14–17
interface board
N1EFF8 8-channel Ethernet optical Slots 14–17
interface board
N1ETS8 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted Slots 14 and 16
pair interface switching board

Table 3-18 lists the data processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN
1500B.

Table 3-18 Data processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1EMS4 (used with 4 x GE and 16 x FE Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s:
the interface board) Ethernet processing slots 12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
board with Lanswitch Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s:
slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EMS4 (not used 4 x GE Ethernet Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s:
with the interface processing board with slots 11-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
board) Lanswitch Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s:
slot 11 (622 Mbit/s), slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EGS4 4 x GE Ethernet Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s:
processing board with slots 11-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Lanswitch Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s:
slot 11 (622 Mbit/s), slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N3EGS4 4 x GE Ethernet Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s:
processing board with slots 11-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Lanswitch Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s:
slot 11 (622 Mbit/s), slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 55 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N2EGS2 2 x GE Ethernet Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s:


processing board with slots 11-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Lanswitch Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s:
slots 11 (622 Mbit/s), 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EGT2 2 x GE Ethernet Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s:
transparent slots 11-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
transmission board Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s:
slots 11 (622 Mbit/s), 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EFS4 4 x FE Ethernet Slots 11–13
processing board with
Lanswitch
N2EFS4 4 x FE Ethernet Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s:
processing board with slots 11-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Lanswitch Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s:
slot 11 (622 Mbit/s), slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EFS0 (used with 8 x FE Ethernet Slots 12–13 (622 Mbit/s)
the interface board) processing board with
Lanswitch
N2EFS0 (used with 8 x FE Ethernet Slots 12–13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
the interface board) processing board with
Lanswitch
N4EFS0 (used with 8 x FE Ethernet Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s:
the interface board) processing board with slots 11-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Lanswitch Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s:
slot 11 (622 Mbit/s), slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EFT8 (not used 8 x 10M/100M Slots 11–13 (622 Mbit/s)
with the interface Ethernet transparent
board) transmission board
N1EFT8 (used with 16 x 10M/100M Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
the interface board) Ethernet transparent
transmission board
N1EFT8A 8 x FE transparent Slots 11–13 (622 Mbit/s)
(interfaces available transmission board
on the front panel)
N2EGR2 2 x GE Ethernet ring Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s:
processing board slots 11-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s:
slot 11 (622 Mbit/s), slot 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N2EMR0 (used with 1 x GE and 12 x FE Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s:
the interface board) Ethernet processing slots 12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
board Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s:
slot 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 56 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N2EMR0 (not used 1 x GE and 4 x FE Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s:
with the interface Ethernet processing slots 11-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
board) board Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s:
slot 11 (622 Mbit/s), slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
R1EFT4 (interfaces 4 x FE processing Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s:
available on the board slots 1-3, 6-9, 11-13 (622 Gbit/s)
front panel) Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s:
slots 6-8, 11-13 (622 Gbit/s)
N1EFF8 8-channel Ethernet Slots 14–17
optical interface board
N1ETS8 8 x 10/100M Ethernet Slots 14 and 16
twisted pair interface
switching board
N1MST4 4-channel multiservice Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s:
transparent slots 11-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
transmission board Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s:
slots 11 (622 Mbit/s), 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1ADQ1 4 x STM-1 ATM Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s:
processing board slots 11-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s:
slot 11 (622 Mbit/s), slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1ADL4 1 x STM-4 ATM Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s:
processing board slots 11-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s:
slot 11 (622 Mbit/s), slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1IDQ1 4 x STM-1 IMA Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s:
processing board slots 11-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s:
slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1IDL4 1 x STM-4 IMA Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s:
processing board slots 11-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s:
slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

Table 3-19 lists the WDM boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B.

Table 3-19 WDM boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1LWX Arbitrary rate access board Slots 11–13

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 57 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

N1MR2A Arbitrary two-wavelength Slots 11–13


add/drop board
N1MR2B Arbitrary two-wavelength Slots 1–3, 6–9 and 11–13
add/drop board (half-width)
N1MR2C Arbitrary two-wavelength Slots 14–17
add/drop board
TN11MR2 2-channel optical add/drop Slots 11–13
multiplexing board
TN11MR4 4-channel optical add/drop Slots 11–13
multiplexing board
TN11CMR2 2-channel CWDM optical Slots 11–13
add/drop multiplexing board
TN11CMR4 4-channel CWDM optical Slots 11–13
add/drop multiplexing board

Table 3-20 lists the optical booster amplifier boards and their valid slots for the OptiX
OSN 1500B.

Table 3-20 Optical booster amplifier boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1BA2 2-channel optical booster Slots 11–13


amplifier board
N1BPA, N2BPA Optical booster preamplifier Slots 11–13
board
TN11OBU1 Optical booster amplifier Slots 11–13
board
N1FIB Filter isolating board Slots 12 and 13
61COA, 62COA, COA board Slots 101–102
N1COA
ROP Single wavelength long-haul Slot 103 (external)
board (remote pumping)

Table 3-21 lists the auxiliary boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B.

Table 3-21 Auxiliary boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Full Name Valid Slots

R1AMU Orderwire processing or alarm Slot 9


concatenation board
R1AUX System auxiliary processing unit Slot 10

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 58 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

R2AUX System auxiliary interface board Slot 10


R1FAN Fan board Slot 20
R1EOW Orderwire communication board Slot 9
R1PIU PIU board Slots 18–19
a
UPM Uninterruptable power module Slot 50
a: The UPM is in case shape. On the T2000, it is displayed as CAU board seated in the logical slot
50.

3.4.3 Technical Specifications


The technical specifications of the subrack provide the dimensions and weight.
Table 3-22 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.

Table 3-22 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack


Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)

444 (W) x 263 (D) x 221 (H) 9 (with the backplane, fan and two PIU boards)

3.5 Boards
The equipment supports different types of boards.

3.5.1 Board Type


The boards are SDH boards, PDH boards and other boards.
The OptiX OSN 1500 system takes a cross-connect matrix as the kernel and consists
of the following units:
 SDH interface unit
 PDH interface unit
 Ethernet interface unit
 DDN interface unit
 ATM interface unit
 SDH cross-connect matrix unit
 Synchronous timing unit
 SCC unit
 Overhead processing unit
 Auxiliary interface unit
Figure 3-8 shows the system architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500. Table 3-23 lists the
constituent boards and functions of each unit.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 59 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 3-8 System architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500

SDH/PDH/Ethernet/
ATM/DDN interface
SDH interface

Cross Connect
PDH signal

board
Matrix
STM-N optical

unit
Ethernet signal
signal ATM signal

Interface unit
Synchronous
processing

timing unit

Auxiliary
Overhead

SCC unit
unit

Table 3-23 Boards for the OptiX OSN 1500


Unit OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B

SDH interface Processing board N1SF16, N1SL16, N2SL16, N1SF16, N1SL16, N2SL16,
unit N3SL16, N1SL16A, N2SL16A, N3SL16, N1SL16A, N2SL16A,
N3SL16A, N1SLQ4, N3SL16A, N1SLQ4,
N1SLQ4A, N2SLQ4, N1SLD4, N1SLQ4A, N2SLQ4, N1SLD4,
N1SLD4A, N2SLD4, N1SL4, N1SLD4A, N2SLD4, N1SL4,
N1SL4A, N2SL4, N2SLO1, N1SL4A, N2SL4, N2SLO1,
N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A, N2SLQ1, N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A, N2SLQ1,
N1SL1, N1SL1A, N2SL1, N1SL1, N1SL1A, N2SL1,
N1SEP1, N1SLT1, R1SL4, N1SEP1, N1SEP, N1SLT1,
R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, R1SL1 R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1,
R1SL1
Interface board - N1EU04, N1EU08, N1OU08,
N2OU08
Protection - N1TSB8, N1TSB4
switching board
PDH interface Processing board R1PD1A, R1PD1B, R2PD1A, R1PD1, R2PD1, N1SPQ4,
unit R2PD1B, N1PL3A, R1PL1A, N2SPQ4, N1PD3, N1PL3,
R1PL1B, N2PL3A N1PL3A, N1PQ1, N1PQM,
N2PQ1, R1PL1A, R1PL1B,
N2PQ3, N2PD3, N2PL3,
N2PL3A
Interface board R1L12S, R1L75S N1MU04, N1D34S, N1C34S,
N1D75S, N1D12S, N1D12B
Protection - N1TSB8, N1TSB4
switching board

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 60 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Unit OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B

DDN interface Convergence N1DXA N1DX1, N1DXA


unit processing board
Interface board - N1DM12
Ethernet Processing board N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N1EFS4, N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N1EFS0,
interface unit N2EFS4, R1EFT4, N1EFT8, N2EFS0, N4EFS0, N1EFS4,
N1EFT8A, N1EMS4, R1EFT4, N1EFT8, N1EFT8A,
N1EGS4, N3EGS4 N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N3EGS4
Interface board - N1ETF8, N1EFF8
Protection - N1ETS8, N1TSB8
switching board
RPR unit Processing board N2EMR0, N2EGR2 N2EMR0, N2EGR2
Interface board - N1ETF8, N1EFF8
ATM interface unit N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4,
N1IDQ1 N1IDQ1
SAN interface unit N1MST4 N1MST4
WDM unit N1MR2A, N1MR2B, N1MR2A, N1MR2B, N1MR2C
TN11MR2, TN11MR4, (seated in slots for interface
TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4 boards), TN11OBU1,
TN11MR2, TN11MR4,
TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4
N1LWX N1LWX
Remote optical pumping unit N1FIB, ROP N1FIB, ROP
Unit that integrates the SCC, line, Q2CXL1, Q3CXL1, Q2CXL4, Q2CXL1, Q3CXL1, Q2CXL4,
cross-connect and clock units Q3CXL4, Q2CXL16, Q3CXL4, Q2CXL16,
Q3CXL16, R1CXLL1, Q3CXL16, R1CXLL1,
R1CXLD1, R1CXLQ1, R1CXLD1, R1CXLQ1,
R1CXLL4, R1CXLD4, R1CXLL4, R1CXLD4,
R1CXLQ4, R1CXLL16 R1CXLQ4, R1CXLL16
Power interface unit R1PIUA R1PIU
UPM (Uninterrupted Power UPM
Module)
Auxiliary interface unit AUX AUX
Orderwire unit EOW, AMU EOW, AMU
Fan unit R1FAN R1FAN
Optical booster amplifier unit 61COA, 62COA, N1COA 61COA, 62COA, N1COA
N1BPA, N2BPA N1BPA, N2BPA
N1BA2 N1BA2

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 61 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Unit OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B

TN11OBU1 TN11OBU1

3.5.2 SDH Processing Boards


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the SDH processing boards.
Table 3-24 lists the SDH processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500.

Table 3-24 SDH processing boards


Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector
N1SL16, N2SL16, Interfaces available on the L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, LC
N3SL16 front panel U-16.2Je
N1SL16A, N2SL16A, Interfaces available on the I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2 LC
N3SL16A front panel
N1SF16 Interfaces available on the Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f LC
front panel
N1SLQ4, N1SLQ4A, Interfaces available on the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC
N2SLQ4 front panel
N1SLD4, N1SLD4A, Interfaces available on the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC
N2SLD4 front panel
N1SL4, N1SL4A, Interfaces available on the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC
N2SL4 front panel
N1SLT1 Interfaces available on the S-1.1 LC
front panel
N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A Interfaces available on the I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, LC
front panel Ve-1.2
N2SLQ1 Interfaces available on the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC
front panel
N1SL1, N1SL1A, Interfaces available on the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC
N2SL1 front panel
R1SLD4 Interfaces available on the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC
front panel
R1SL4 Interfaces available on the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC
front panel
R1SLQ1 Interfaces available on the I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, LC
front panel Ve-1.2
R1SL1 Interfaces available on the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC
front panel
N1SEP1a Interfaces available on the 75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical SMB

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 62 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector


front panel interface
N1SEPa Interfaces available on the 4 x 75-ohm STM-1 electrical SMB
STM-1 line processing board interface
N1EU04
Interfaces available on the 8 x I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1 LC
STM-1 line processing board
N1OU08
Interfaces available on the 8 x I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1 SC
STM-1 line processing board
N2OU08
Interfaces available on the 8 x 75-ohm STM-1 electrical SMB
STM-1 line processing board interface
N1EU08
N2SLO1 Interfaces available on the I-1.1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, LC
front panel Ve-1.2
Q2CXL16, Q3CXL16, Interfaces available on the I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2 LC
R1CXLL16b front panel
Q2CXL4, Q3CXL4, Interfaces available on the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC
R1CXLL4, R1CXLD4, front panel
R1CXLQ4b
Q2CXL1, Q3CXL1, Interfaces available on the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC
R1CXLL1, R1CXLD1, front panel
R1CXLQ1b
a: The N1SEP1 and N1SEP are boards of the same type. If they are used with the interface board, they are displayed as
"N1SEP" on the T2000. If the interfaces on their front panels are used, they are displayed as "N1SEP1" on the T2000.
b: The CXL is a board that integrates the line, SCC, cross-connect, and timing units for the OptiX OSN 1500. It can be
seated in slot 4 and slot 5. On the T2000, the CXL board is displayed as three board types: ECXL/RCXL, GSCC and
SLN/SLD41/SLQ41, seated in the logical slots 80-81, 82-83 and 4-5.

3.5.3 PDH Processing Boards


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the PDH processing boards.
Table 3-25 lists the PDH processing boards and the valid slots of the OptiX OSN
1500A. Table 3-26 lists the PDH processing boards and the valid slots of the OptiX
OSN 1500B.

Table 3-25 PDH processing boards (OptiX OSN 1500A)


Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector

N1PL3A Interfaces available on the front panel 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface SMB
N2PL3A Interfaces available on the front panel 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface SMB

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 63 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

R1PD1A Interfaces available on the 16 x 75-ohm E1 electrical interface DB44


electrical interface switching board
R1L75S
R1PD1B Interfaces available on the 16 x 120-ohm E1 electrical interface DB44
electrical interface switching board
R1L12S
R2PD1A Interfaces available on the 16 x 75-ohm E1 electrical interface DB44
electrical interface switching board
R1L75S
R2PD1B Interfaces available on the 16 x 120-ohm E1 electrical interface DB44
electrical interface switching board
R1L12S
R1PL1 Interfaces available on the front panel 2mmHM 2mmHM

Table 3-26 PDH processing boards (OptiX OSN 1500B)


Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector

N1SPQ4 Interfaces available on the 4 x electrical 75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical SMB


interface board N1MU04 interface
N2SPQ4 Interfaces available on the 4 x electrical 75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical SMB
interface board N1MU04 interface
N1PD3 Interfaces available on the 6 x electrical 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical SMB
interface switching board N1D34S interface
N1PL3 Interfaces available on the 3 x electrical 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical SMB
interface switching board N1C34S interface
N1PL3A Interfaces available on the front panel 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical SMB
interface
N2PQ3 Interfaces available on the 6 x electrical 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical SMB
interface switching board N1D34S interface
N2PD3 Interfaces available on the 6 x electrical 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical SMB
interface switching board N1D34S interface
N2PL3 Interfaces available on the 3 x electrical 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical SMB
interface switching board N1C34S interface
N2PL3A Interfaces available on the front panel 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical SMB
interface
N1PQ1A Interfaces available on the 32-channel 75-ohm E1 interface DB44
electrical interface switching board N1D75S
N1PQ1B Interfaces available on the 32-channel 120-ohm E1 interface DB44
electrical interface switching board N1D12S
N2PQ1A Interfaces available on the 32-channel 75-ohm E1 interface DB44
electrical interface switching board N1D75S

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 64 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector

N2PQ1B Interfaces available on the 32-channel 120-ohm E1 interface DB44


electrical interface switching board N1D12S
N1PQM Interfaces available on the 32-channel 120-ohm E1 interface, DB44
electrical interface switching board N1D12S 100-ohm T1 interface
R1PD1A Interfaces available on the 32-channel 75-ohm E1 interface DB44
electrical interface switching board N1D75S
R1PD1B Interfaces available on the 32-channel 120-ohm E1 interface DB44
electrical interface switching board N1D12S
R2PD1A Interfaces available on the 32-channel 75-ohm E1 interface DB44
electrical interface switching board N1D75S
R2PD1B Interfaces available on the 32-channel 120-ohm E1 interface DB44
electrical interface switching board N1D12S
R1PL1 Interfaces available on the front panel 2mmHM 2mmHM

3.5.4 DDN Processing Boards


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports DDN processing boards.
Table 3-27 lists the DDN processing boards.

Table 3-27 DDN processing boards


Board Full Name Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector

N1DX1 N x 64 kbit/s service Interfaces available on RS449, EIA530, DB28, DB44


access and the N x 64 kbit/s interface EIA530-A, V.35, V.24,
convergence board board N1DM12 X.21, Framed E1
N1DXA N x 64 kbit/s service None None None
convergence board

3.5.5 Data Processing Boards


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports data processing boards.
Table 3-28 lists the Ethernet and ATM data processing boards of the OptiX OSN
1500A and their interfaces. Table 3-29 lists the Ethernet and ATM data processing
boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B and their interfaces.

Table 3-28 Data processing boards and their interfaces (OptiX OSN 1500A)
Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector

N2EGS2 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC


N1EFS4 Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
N2EFS4 Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 65 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

N1EGT2 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC


N1EFT8 Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
N1EFT8A Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100Base-TX RJ-45
R1EFT4 Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
N1EMS4 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000Base-SX/LX/ZX LC
N1EGS4 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000Base-SX/LX/ZX LC
N3EGS4 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC
N2EMR0 Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100BASE-TX, 100BASE-FX, RJ-45, LC
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
N2EGR2 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC
N1ADL4 Interfaces available on the front panel S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC
N1ADQ1 Interfaces available on the front panel Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, I-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC
N1IDL4 Interfaces available on the front panel S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC
N1IDQ1 Interfaces available on the front panel Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, I-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC
N1MST4 Interfaces available on the front panel X3.296/(DVB-ASI)EN50083-9, -
200-M5-SN-I, 200-SM-LC-I

Table 3-29 Data processing boards and their interfaces (OptiX OSN 1500B)
Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector

N2EGS2 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC


N1EFS0 Interfaces available on the N1ETF8 (8 x 10/100 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
Mbit/s Ethernet twisted pair interface board)
Interfaces available on the N1EFF8 (8 x 10/100 100BASE-FX LC
Mbit/s Ethernet optical interface board)
N2EFS0 Interfaces available on the N1ETF8 (8 x 10/100 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
Mbit/s Ethernet twisted pair interface board)
Interfaces available on the N1EFF8 (8 x 10/100 100BASE-FX LC
Mbit/s Ethernet optical interface board)
N4EFS0 Interfaces available on the N1ETF8 (8 x 10/100 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
Mbit/s Ethernet twisted pair interface board)
Interfaces available on the N1EFF8 (8 x 10/100 100BASE-FX LC
Mbit/s Ethernet optical interface board)
N1EFS4 Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
N2EFS4 Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
N1EGT2 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 66 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector

N1EFT8 Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45


Interfaces available on the N1ETF8 (8 x 10/100 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
Mbit/s Ethernet twisted pair interface board)
Interfaces available on the N1EFF8 (8 x 10/100 100BASE-FX LC
Mbit/s Ethernet optical interface board)
N1EFT8A Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
N2EMR0 Interfaces available on the N1ETF8 (8 x 10/100 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
Mbit/s Ethernet twisted pair interface board)
Interfaces available on the N1EFF8 (8 x 10/100 100BASE-FX LC
Mbit/s Ethernet optical interface board)
Interfaces available on the front panel 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC
N2EGR2 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC
N1EMS4 Interfaces available on the N1ETF8 (8 x 10/100 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
Mbit/s Ethernet twisted pair interface board)
Interfaces available on the N1EFF8 (8 x 10/100 100BASE-FX LC
Mbit/s Ethernet optical interface board)
Interfaces available on the front panel 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC
N1EGS4 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC
N3EGS4 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC
N1ADL4 Interfaces available on the front panel S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, LC
Ve-4.2
N1ADQ1 Interfaces available on the front panel Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, LC
I-1.2, Ve-1.2
N1IDL4 Interfaces available on the front panel S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, LC
Ve-4.2
N1IDQ1 Interfaces available on the front panel Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, LC
I-1.2, Ve-1.2
N1MST4 Interfaces available on the front panel X3.296/(DVB-ASI) LC
EN50083-9,
200-M5-SN-I,
200-SM-LC-I
R1EFT4 Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45

3.5.6 WDM Boards


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports WDM boards.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 67 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Table 3-30 lists the WDM boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A and their interfaces. Table
3-31 lists the WDM boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B and their interfaces.

Table 3-30 WDM boards and their interfaces (OptiX OSN 1500A)
Board Interfacing Mode Connector

N1MR2A Interfaces available on the front panel LC


N1MR2B Interfaces available on the front panel LC
N1LWX Interfaces available on the front panel LC
TN11MR2 Interfaces available on the front panel LC
TN11MR4 Interfaces available on the front panel LC
TN11CMR2 Interfaces available on the front panel LC
TN11CMR4 Interfaces available on the front panel LC

Table 3-31 WDM boards and their interfaces (OptiX OSN 1500B)
Board Interfacing Mode Connector

N1MR2A Interfaces available on the front panel LC


N1MR2B Interfaces available on the front panel LC
N1MR2C Interfaces available on the front panel LC
N1LWX Interfaces available on the front panel LC
TN11MR2 Interfaces available on the front panel LC
TN11MR4 Interfaces available on the front panel LC
TN11CMR2 Interfaces available on the front panel LC
TN11CMR4 Interfaces available on the front panel LC

3.5.7 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports several optical amplifier boards.
Table 3-32 lists the optical booster amplifier boards and their interfaces.

Table 3-32 Optical booster amplifier boards and their interfaces


Board Interfacing Mode Connector

N1BA2 Interfaces available on the front panel LC


N1BPA, N2BPA Interfaces available on the front panel LC
TN11OBU1 Interfaces available on the front panel LC

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 68 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

61COA Interfaces available on the front panel SC


N1COA Interfaces available on the front panel SC
62COA Interfaces available on the front panel SC, E2000
ROP Interfaces available on the front panel LC
N1FIB Interfaces available on the front panel LC, E2000

3.5.8 Auxiliary Boards


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports auxiliary boards.
Table 3-33 lists the auxiliary boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Table 3-34 lists the auxiliary boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B.

Table 3-33 Auxiliary boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A


Board Connector

R1PIUA Power supply interface


R1FAN None
R1AUX RJ-45
R2AUX RJ-45
R1AMU RJ-45
R1EOW RJ-11, RJ-45

Table 3-34 Auxiliary boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B


Board Connector

R1PIU Power supply interface


R1FAN None
R1AUX RJ-45
R2AUX RJ-45
R1AMU RJ-45
R1EOW RJ-11, RJ-45

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 69 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

4 Software

4.1 Overview
The software system of the OptiX OSN 1500 is of a modular structure.
The software system includes the following modules:
 Board software (residing in each relevant board)
 NE software (residing in the SCC board)
 T2000 software (residing on a T2000 computer)
 ASON software (contained in the NE software)
The software system of the OptiX OSN 1500 is as shown in Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1 Software system structure of the OptiX OSN 1500

T2000 software

ASON
software

NE software

Board software

 The ASON software can interact with the T2000 software directly, but it needs the NE
software to intercommunicate with the board software.
 During the software loading, the ASON software is loaded together with the NE software.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 71 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

4.2 Board Software


The board software runs on each board, and manages, monitors and controls the
operation of the board.
The board software receives the commands issued by the NE software and reports
the board status to the NE software in the form of performance events and alarms.
The board software functions include alarm management, performance management,
configuration management, and communication management. The board software
directly controls the functional modules in a board and implements specific NE
functions that are compliant with ITU-T Recommendations. The board software
provides support for the management of boards performed by the NE software.
The board software is mainly classified into the line software, the tributary software,
the cross-connect software, the data board software, the clock software, and the
orderwire software.

4.3 NE Software
The NE software is used to manage, monitor and control the operation of the boards
of an NE. The NE software also functions as the communication unit between the
T2000 system and the boards. Through the NE software, the T2000 system can
control and manage NEs.
In compliance with ITU-T M.3010, the NE software belongs to the element
management layer in the telecommunications management network (TMN), and
provides NE functions, some coordination functions, and operations system functions
at the network element layer. The data communication function implements the
communication between the NE and other components (including equipment, the
T2000 system, and other NEs).
The NE software consists of the following modules:
 Real-time multi-task operating system
 Network side (NS) module
 Equipment administration module (AM)
 Communication module
 Database management module

Real-Time Multi-task Operating System


The real-time multi-task operating system of the OptiX OSN 1500 NE software is
responsible for the management of public resources and provides support for the
execution of applications. This system provides an application execution environment
that is independent of the processor hardware, to separate applications from the
processor.

Network Side (NS) Module


The NS module is between the communication module and the equipment
management module. It converts the data format between the user operation side (at

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 72 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

the application layer) and the NE equipment management layer, and provides security
control for the NE layer.
Functionally, the NS module is divided into the following three submodules:
 Qx interface module
 Command line interface module
 Security management module

Equipment Administration Module (AM)


The equipment AM is the kernel of the NE software for implementing NE management,
and includes the Manager and the Agent. The Manager sends network management
operation commands and receives event information. The Agent responds to the
network management operation commands sent by the Manager, performs operations
to managed objects, and reports events according to the status change of the
managed objects.
The equipment AM includes the configuration management module, the performance
management module, the alarm management module, and the MSP switching
management module.

Communication Module
The communication module performs the message communication function (MCF) of
the functional blocks of the transmission network equipment. Through the hardware
interface provided by the SCC board, the communication module transmits the
OAM&P information and exchanges management information between the T2000
system and NEs, and between NEs themselves. This module consists of the network
communication module, the serial communication module, and the ECC
communication module.

Database Management Module


The database management module is an integral component of the NE software, and
consists of the data and the management system. The database, organized as a
relational database, includes the network database, alarm database, performance
database, and equipment database. The management system manages and
accesses the data in the database.

4.4 T2000 System


The OptiX OSN 1500 is uniformly managed by the OptiX iManager T2000
transmission network management system (hereinafter referred to as the T2000).
The T2000 is used as a network management system to implement a uniform
management of the optical transmission network, and to maintain all the optical
network equipment in the network. In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, the
T2000 adopts a standard management information model and the object-oriented
management technology. The T2000 exchanges information with the NE software
through the communication module, to implement monitoring and management over
the network equipment.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 73 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

The T2000 software manages OptiX equipment through the Qx interface, which
adopts a management protocol specially designed for the OptiX equipment.
The T2000 software runs on a workstation or a PC. The T2000 enables the user not
only to operate and maintain the transmission equipment, but also to manage the
transmission network.
 Alarm management
The T2000 realizes the following alarm management functions: real-time collection,
prompting, filtering, browsing, acknowledgement, check, clearing, counting, alarm
insertion, alarm correlation analysis, and fault diagnosis.
 Performance management
The T2000 realizes the setting of performance monitoring, and enables the user to
browse, analyze, and print performance data. The short-term and long-term
performance forecast and the performance register reset are also supported.
 Configuration management
The T2000 enables the user to configure and manage interfaces, clocks, services,
trails, protections, and time.
 Security management
The T2000 realizes NM user management, NE user management, NE login
management, NE login lockout, NE setting lockout, and local craft terminal (LCT)
access control.
 Maintenance management
The T2000 provides the loopback, board reset, automatic laser shutdown (ALS), and
optical power detection, and data collection functions, to help the maintenance
personnel in troubleshooting.

4.5 ASON Software


According to the ITU-T Recommendations, an automatically switched optical network
(ASON) includes three planes: control plane, management plane, and transport plane.
The management plane refers to an upper layer management system such as the
T2000. The transport plane refers to a traditional SDH network. The control plane is
where the ASON software is applied, and uses the LMP (link management protocol),
OSPF-TE (open shortest path first- traffic engineering), and RSVP-TE (reservation
protocol-traffic engineering) protocols.
Figure 4-2 shows the ASON software architecture. The ASON software mainly
includes the link management module, the signaling module, the routing module, and
the cross-connection management module.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 74 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 4-2 ASON software architecture

AOSN software

T2000 Signaling module NE


software
Cross-connection
management
module
Routing module

LMP link management


module

Link Management Module


By using the LMP protocol, the link management module provides the following
functions:
 Create and maintain control channels.
 Verify member links and TE links.

Signaling Module
By using the RSVP-TE protocol, the signaling module provides the following
functions:
 Set up or interrupt service connections according to user requests.
 Synchronize and restore services on the basis of service status changes.

Routing Module
By using the OSPF-TE protocol, the routing module provides the following functions:
 Collect and flood the TE link information.
 Collect and flood the control link information of the control plane.
 Compute service trails and control the routing.

Cross-Connection Management Module


The cross-connection management module provides the following functions:
 Create and delete cross-connections.
 Report link status, alarms, and other relevant information.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 75 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

5 Data Features

5.1 Ethernet Features


This section describes the functions, application and protection of the Ethernet
features of the OptiX OSN 1500.

5.1.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides many Ethernet boards to meet different Ethernet
service requirements.
Table 5-1 lists the Ethernet functions of the EFS4 and EFS0 boards.
Table 5-2 lists the Ethernet functions of the EGS2 board.
Table 5-3 lists the Ethernet functions of the EGS4 and EGS4A boards.
Table 5-4 lists the Ethernet functions of the EMS4 board.
Table 5-5 lists the Ethernet functions of the EGT2, EFT8, EFT8A and EFT4 boards.

Table 5-1 Function list of EFS4 and EFS0


Function N1EFS4 N2EFS4 N1EFS0 N2EFS0 N4EFS0

Interface 4 FE 4 FE 8 FE 8 FE 8 FE
Interface type 10Base-T, 100Base-TX 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 100Base-FX
Interface board None None N1ETF8, N1ETS8 N1ETS8 (used
N1EFF8 (used with with TSB8 to
TSB8 to realize 1:1
realize 1:1 TPS),
TPS), N1ETF8,
N1ETF8, N1EFF8
N1EFF8
Service frame In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p
format
JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 77 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Function N1EFS4 N2EFS4 N1EFS0 N2EFS0 N4EFS0

Uplink 4 VC-4 8 VC-4 4 VC-4 8 VC-4 8 VC-4


bandwidth
Mapping mode VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤12)
Number of 12 24 12 24 24
VCTRUNKs
Ethernet private Supported
line (EPL)
Ethernet virtual Supported
private line
(EVPL)
Ethernet private Supported
LAN (EPLAN)
Ethernet virtual Not supported
private LAN
(EVPLAN)
Static MPLS MartinioE label supported
label
Stack VLAN Supported
VLAN Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p
RSTP Supported
Multicast Supported
listening (IGMP
Snooping)
Encapsulation GFP-F (Frame - Mapped GFP)
Link state pass Supports Supports P2P Supports P2P Supports Supports P2P
through (LPT) P2P LPT and P2MP LPT LPT P2P LPT and P2MP LPT
Link capacity In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
adjustment
scheme (LCAS)
Committed Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
access rate
(CAR)
Flow control In compliance with IEEE 802.3x
Intra-board link Not Supported Not Supported Supported
aggregation supported supported
Test frame Supported

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 78 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Function N1EFS4 N2EFS4 N1EFS0 N2EFS0 N4EFS0

Ethernet OAM Not Supported, in Not Not supported Supported, in


supported compliance with supported compliance
IEEE 802.1ag with IEEE
and IEEE 802.1ag and
802.3ah IEEE 802.3ah
Ethernet Supported
performance
monitoring
NSF Function Not Supported Not Not supported Supported
supported supported

Table 5-2 Function list of EGS2


Function N2EGS2

Interface 2 GE
Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX
Interface board None
Service frame In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p
format
JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes
Uplink bandwidth 16 VC-4
Mapping mode VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤12)
Number of 48
VCTRUNKs
EPL Supported
EVPL Supported
EPLAN Supported
EVPLAN Not supported
Static MPLS label MartinioE label supported
Stack VLAN Supported
VLAN Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p
RSTP Supported
Multicast listening Supported
(IGMP snooping)
Encapsulation GFP-F

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 79 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Function N2EGS2

LPT Supports P2P LPT


LCAS In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
QoS traffic Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+VLAN+PRI flow.
classification
CoS Supported
Shaping Supported
Flow control In compliance with IEEE 802.3x
Test frame Supported
Ethernet Supported
performance
monitoring
Ethernet OAM Not supported
RMON Supported
Link aggregation Supports manual link aggregation

Table 5-3 Function list of EGS4 and EGS4A


Function N1EGS4 N3EGS4

Interface 4 x GE
Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX
Interface board None
Service frame In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p
format
JUMBO frame Supported, 9216 bytes
Uplink 16 VC-4
bandwidth
Mapping mode VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤24), VC-4-xv
(x≤8)
Number of 64
VCTRUNKs
EPL Supported
EVPL Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services.
EPLAN Supported

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 80 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Function N1EGS4 N3EGS4

EVPLAN Supported
Static MPLS Not supported
label
VLAN Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.
RSTP Supported
Multicast Supported
listening (IGMP
snooping)
Encapsulation GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC
LPT Supports P2P and P2MP LPT Supports P2P LPT
LCAS In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
BPS Supported
PPS Supported
CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
QoS traffic Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+SVLAN flow.
classification
CoS Supported
Shaping Supported
Flow control Supports flow control based on GE port, in compliance with IEEE
802.3x
Ethernet Supported
performance
monitoring
Ethernet OAM Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah
Test frame Supported
Link Supports manual link aggregation, static link aggregation and
aggregation distributed link aggregation.

Table 5-4 Function list of EMS4


Function N1EMS4

Interface 4 GE and 16 FE
Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX, 10Base-T,
100Base-TX, 100Base-FX

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 81 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Function N1EMS4

Interface board Supports 4 x GE if it is not used with an interface board.


Supports 4 x GE and 16 x FE if it is used with interface boards
N1ETF8 and N1EFF8.
Protection Supports 1+1 intra-board protection and port level protection.
Service frame In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p
format
JUMBO frame Supported, 9216 bytes
Uplink bandwidth 16 VC-4
Mapping mode VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤24), VC-4-xv
(x≤8)
Number of 64
VCTRUNKs
EPL Supported
EVPL Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services.
EPLAN Supported
EVPLAN Supported
Static MPLS Not supported
label
VLAN Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.
RSTP Supported
Multicast Supported
listening (IGMP
snooping)
Encapsulation GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC
LPT Supports P2P amd P2MP LPT
LCAS In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
BPS/PPS Supported
CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
QoS traffic Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and por+SVLAN flow.
classification
CoS Supported
Shaping Supported
Flow control Supports flow control based on GE/FE port, in compliance with
IEEE 802.3x

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 82 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Function N1EMS4

Ethernet Supported
performance
monitoring
Ethernet OAM Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah
Test frame Supported
Service mirroring Supported
Link aggregation Supports manual link aggregation, static link aggregation and
distributed link aggregation.

Table 5-5 Function list of EGT2, EFT8, EFT8A and EFT4


Function N1EGT2 N1EFT8 N1EFT8A R1EFT4

Interface 2 GE 16 FE 8 FE 4 FE
Interface type 1000Base-SX, 10Base-T, 10Base-T, 10Base-T,
1000Base-LX, 100Base-TX, 100Base-TX 100Base-TX
1000Base-ZX 100Base-FX
Interface board None Supports 8 x FE if None None
it is not used with
an interface board.
Supports 16 x FE
if it is used with
the N1ETF8 and
N1EFF8 interface
boards.
Service frame Iformat In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1qTAG
JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 Supported, 9600 Supported by the Supported, 9600
bytes bytes latter four ports, bytes
9600 bytes
Uplink bandwidth 16 VC-4 8 VC-4 4 VC-4 4 VC-4
Mapping mode VC-3, VC-4, VC-12, VC-3, VC-12, VC-3, VC-12, VC-3,
VC-3-xv (x≤24), VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-12-xv (x≤63),
VC-4-xv (x≤8) VC-3-xv (x≤3) VC-3-xv (x≤3) VC-3-xv (x≤3)
Number of 2 16 8 4
VCTRUNKs
Ethernet service types Only EPL supported; EVPL, EPLAN and EVPLAN not supported
MPLS Not supported
VLAN Transparent transmission
Encapsulation GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 83 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Function N1EGT2 N1EFT8 N1EFT8A R1EFT4

LPT Supports P2P LPT


LCAS In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
CAR Not supported
Flow control In compliance with IEEE 802.3x
Test frame Supported
Ethernet OAM Not supported
Ethernet performance Supported
monitoring

5.1.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 1500 has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH
transmission platform.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the following types of Ethernet services:
 EPL Service
 EVPL Service
 EPLAN Service
 EVPLAN Service

EPL Service
The EPL implements the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services.
As shown in Figure 5-1, the Ethernet services of different NEs are transmitted to the
destination node through their respective VCTRUNKs. The Ethernet services are also
protected by the SDH self-healing ring (SHR). This ensures the secure and reliable
transmission of services.

Figure 5-1 EPL service based on port


B B
PORT2 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2 PORT2

PORT1 POTR1
VCTRUNK 1 VCTRUNK 1
A
A

NE 1 NE 2

OptiX OSN Enterprise


equipment user

EVPL Service
The OptiX OSN 1500 adopts two ways to support EVPL services.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 84 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

 Port-shared EVPL services. The services are isolated by VLAN tags and share a
bandwidth.
As shown in Figure 5-2, traffic classification is performed for the Ethernet service
according to VLAN ID, to distinguish different VLANs from different departments of
Companie A. The two traffics are transmitted in respective VCTRUNKs.

Figure 5-2 Port-shared EVPL services


Department 1
Headquarters of
company A VLAN100
VCTRUNK1
VLAN100 PORT1
VCTRUNK2 VLAN200
VLAN200
PORT2
PORT1
Department 2

NE 1 NE 2

OptiX OSN
Enterprise
equipment
user

 VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services. OptiX OSN 1500 adopts three ways to realize
convergence and distribution of EVPL services.
− EVPL services based on VLAN ID, as shown in Figure 5-3.
− EVPL services based on MPLS, as shown in Figure 5-4.
− EVPL services based on QinQ, as shown in Figure 5-5.

Figure 5-3 EVPL service based on VLAN ID


B B'
VLAN200 VLAN200
VCTRUNK
VLAN100 VLAN100

A PORT1 PORT2 PORT2 PORT1 A'

NE 1 NE 2

Community Cyber cafe OptiX OSN


user user equipment

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 85 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 5-4 EVPL service based on MPLS


Add label Strip label
PE P P PE
Department Department
PORT2 PORT2
B B
VCTRUNK1
Department
Department
A PORT1 PORT1
NE 2 A
NE 1

Branch 1 Branch 2

Company A OptiX OSN


equipment

Figure 5-5 EVPL service based on QinQ


Add label Strip label
C-Aware S-Aware S-Aware C-Aware
Department Department
PORT2 PORT2
B B
VCTRUNK1
Department
Department
A PORT1 PORT1
NE 2 A
NE 1

Branch 1 Branch 2

Company A OptiX OSN


equipment

EPLAN Service
Though the EPLAN service, NEs can communicate with each other and dynamically
share a bandwidth, the OptiX OSN 1500 adopts virtual bridge (VB)
to support Layer 2 switching of Ethernet data. This is referred to as the EPLAN
service.
Each NE in the system can create one or several VBs. Each VB establishes a media
access control (MAC) address table. The system updates the table by self-learning.
The data packets accessed select the mapping VCTRUNK according to the MAC
address table, as shown in Figure 5-6.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 86 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 5-6 EPLAN service

PORT1

VB VCTRUNK1

Department 3 Port 1
of company A NE3

VCTRUNK2

VB PORT1
PORT1 VB
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK1

Port 1 NE 1 NE 2 Port 1

Department 1
Department 2
of company A
of company A
Access OptiX OSN
Company A
point equipment

EVPLAN Service
The EVPLAN services can dynamically share the bandwidth and support for the data
packets accessed into the same VLAN. When the data services with the same VLAN
ID are accessed into the same NE and dynamically share the bandwidth, the EVPLAN
service can meet the service requirements.
As shown in Figure 5-7, the Ethernet processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500 adopt
VB+S-VLAN filter table to support the EVPLAN services.

Figure 5-7 EVPLAN service


PORT2
PORT1

VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1

Department 3
of company B
VB1

Department 3
C-Aware S-Aware
of company A
Port 1 NE3

VCTRUNK2
Port 2 VCTRUNK1
C-Aware
PORT2 C-Aware
VB1 PORT2
PORT1 VB1
S-Aware LSP LSP PORT1
S-Aware
VCTRUNK1 NE 1 NE 2
VCTRUNK2
Port 2
LSP Port 1

Port 1 Port 2

Department 2
of company B
Department 2
Department 1 Department 1 of company A
of company A of company B

Acess OptiX OSN


Company A Company B
point equipment

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 87 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

5.1.3 Protection
OptiX OSN 1500 provides layered protection on Ethernet services.
The optical transmission layer supports MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.
The protection schemes supported at the Ethernet service layer are as follows:
 LCAS
 STP/RSTP
 Tributary protection switching (TPS)
 Board protection switching (BPS)
 Port protection switching (PPS)
 Link aggregation group (LAG)
 DLAG
 LPT

LCAS
The LCAS provides an error tolerance mechanism to enhance the reliability of the
virtual concatenation function. The LCAS has the following functions:
 When the LCAS is applied in the virtual concatenation technology, the LCAS
enables the configuration of system capacity, the increase and decrease of the
concatenated VC quantity, and the dynamic change of bearer bandwidth
(services are not damaged during the dynamic change).
 The LCAS protects and restores failed members.
As shown in Figure 5-8, the LCAS can dynamically add or delete members to increase
or decrease the bandwidth. Services are not interrupted during this bandwidth
adjustment.

Figure 5-8 Dynamic bandwidth adjustment through LCAS


I want another 10 M MSTP network
bandwidth. Member

Member Headquarters
Branch

Member

Member Headquarters
Branch
New member

OptiX NE

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 88 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

As shown in Figure 5-9, the LCAS realizes the protection of the Ethernet service.
When some members fail, the faulty members are automatically deleted, whereas
other members transmit data normally. When the faulty members are available again,
they are automatically restored, and the data is loaded to these members again.

Figure 5-9 Virtual concatenation group protection through LCAS


MSTP network
Member

Member
Headquarters

Branch Failed
member

Member

Member
Headquarters

Branch Delete failed


member

OptiX NE

STP/RSTP
The Ethernet boards support the spanning tree protocol (STP) and the rapid spanning
tree protocol (RSTP). When the STP or the RSTP is started, it logically modifies the
network topology to prevent a broadcast storm. The STP or the RSTP realizes link
protection by restructuring the topology.

TPS
The TPS provides equipment level protection for tributary services. When a protected
board becomes faulty, its services are switched to the protection board. This ensures
a reliable operation of the equipment.
The OSN 1500B supports one group of 1:1 TPS protection for the N2EFS0 or
N4EFS0 board.

BPS
The BPS is a board-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a
standby board. When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or
detects a board hardware failure, the cross-connect board switches all the services
from the active board to the standby board to realize the service protection.
The N1EGS4, N3EGS4 and N1EMS4 boards both support BPS.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 89 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

PPS
The PPS is a port-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a
standby board. When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or
detects a board hardware failure, the cross-connect board switches the services of
one or more affected ports to the standby boards. In this case, a protection switching
for the entire board is not necessary.
Compared with the BPS, the PPS has lesser impact on external systems and the
network.
The N1EGS4, N3EGS4 and N1EMS4 boards both support the PPS.

LAG
A link aggregation group (LAG) bundles multiple links that are connected to the same
equipment, to increase the bandwidth and improve the link reliability. An LAG can be
regarded as one link.
The LAG provides the following functions:
 Improves the link availability. In an LAG, members dynamically back up each
other. When one link is interrupted, other members quickly replace the link to
provide services.
 Adds the link bandwidth. The LAG is an economical method for the user to
increase the link transmission rate. When multiple physical links are bundled, the
user is able to obtain a data link of higher bandwidth, without an upgrade of the
existing equipment. The capacity of an LAG is equal to the sum of the capacity of
all the member links.
 Balances load. Multiple physical links in an LAG share the traffic load and back
up each other.
 Improves the reliability. Members in an LAG dynamically back up each other.
The LAG has three modes: dynamic aggregation, manual aggregation, and static
aggregation. For details, refer to B.4 Link Aggregation.
The N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and N3EGS4 boards support link aggregation, and currently
support only manual aggregation and static aggregation.

DLAG
The DLAG requires two boards. One board is the working board and the other is the
protection board.
During switching, only the affected ports are switched and the other ports are not
switched. The equipment configured with the DLAG should be connected to the
equipment where the LACP is running. When any intermediate node is between two
equipment sets where the DLAG is configured, the intermediated node should support
the transparent transmission of the protocol packets.
The DLAG can be of modes: revertive or non-revertive.
 Revertive mode
If the working board becomes faulty, the DLAG is switched to the protection board.
When the working board is restored, the DLAG is automatically switched to the
working board.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 90 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

 Non-revertive mode
If the working board becomes faulty, the DLAG is switched to the protection board.
When the working board is restored, the DLAG is not automatically switched to the
working board unless the protection board becomes faulty.
The N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and N3EGS4 boards support distributed link aggregation.

LPT
The link state pass through (LPT) is a link-based protection scheme. In a network,
when the active and standby ports between routers belong to different links, the LPT
function is available for protection. When the working link becomes faulty, the LPT
function shuts down the local port so that the opposite router knows that the working
link is abnormal. As a result, services are switched from the active port to the standby
port. Thus, these services are protected.
The LPT function includes P2P and P2MP LPT.

MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP


At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected by the MSP,
SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP schemes. For details, refer to 8.2.2 MSP Ring and 8.2.3
SNCP.

5.2 RPR Features


This section describes the functions, application and protection of the RPR features of
the OptiX OSN 1500.
The RPR defined by IEEE 802.17 uses a dual-ring topology in which the two rings are
in reverse directions, as shown in Figure 5-10. The outer ring and the inner ring
transmit data packets and control packets. Hence, this increases the bandwidth
utilization. The control packets on the inner ring carry the control information of the
data packets on the outer ring, and the control packets on the outer ring carry the
control information of the data packets on the inner ring. The two rings protect each
other.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 91 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 5-10 RPR ring


Node 1

Outer ring data


Outer ring control

Node 2 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 4

Inner ring data


Inner ring control

Node 3

5.2.1 Functions
The RPR functions provide the basic functions, service class, topology auto-discovery,
spatial reuse and fairness algorithm.

Basic Functions
The EMR0 and EGR2 boards of the OptiX OSN 1500 support the RPR features
defined by IEEE 802.17. Table 5-6 lists the basic functions of the RPR boards.

Table 5-6 Function list of RPR boards


Function N2EMR0 N2EGR2

Interface 1 GE and 12 FE 2 GE
Service frame format Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1QTAG
JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes
Maximum uplink 16 VC-4 (2.5 Gbit/s)
bandwidth
Mapping granularity VC-3, VC-3-2v, VC-4, VC-4-xv (X≤8)
EVPL Supported
EVPLAN Supported
Static MPLS label MartinioE label supported
Stack VLAN Supported
VLAN Supports 4096 VLAN tags, and the adding, deleting, and
exchange of VLAN tags; compliant with IEEE 802.1q/p.
Spanning tree Supports RSTP and STP

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 92 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Function N2EMR0 N2EGR2

Multicast listening Supported


(IGMP Snooping)
RPR protection Supports the steering, wrapping, wrapping+steering
protection schemes, with the protection switching time
being less than 50 ms.
Encapsulation GFP-F, compliant with ITU-T G.7041.
LAPS, compliant with ITU-T X.86.
LCAS Supported, compliant with ITU-T G.7042
CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
Flow control Supported, compliant with IEEE 802.3X
QoS traffic The N2EM40 and N2EGR2 boards support traffic
classification classification based on port, port+VLAN ID or port+VLAN
ID+VLAN PRI.
Intra-board link Supported
aggregation
Weighted fairness Supported
algorithm
Topology Supported
auto-discovery
Maximum number of 255
nodes
Service class Five classes: A0, A1, B_CIR, B_EIR and C

Service Class
The user data has three classes, which are A, B and C. On an RPR ring, Class A is
further divided into the A0 and A1 subclasses. Class B is also divided into the B_CIR
(committed information rate) and B_EIR (excess information rate) subclasses.
Table 5-7 lists the differences among these classes.

Table 5-7 RPR service class


Class Subclass Bandwidth Jitter Fairness Application
Algorithm

A A0 Pre-allocated, Low Irrelevant Real-time services


irreclaimable
A1 Pre-allocated, Low Irrelevant Real-time services
reclaimable

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 93 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Class Subclass Bandwidth Jitter Fairness Application


Algorithm

B B_CIR Pre-allocated, Medium Irrelevant Near real-time


reclaimable services
B_EIR Preemptible, not High Relevant Near real-time
pre-allocated services
C C Preemptible, not High Relevant Best effort
pre-allocated transmission

Topology Auto-Discovery
The topology auto-discovery protocol provides an accurate and reliable method to
quickly discover the topologies and their changes, for all the nodes in a ring network.
Hence, the topology auto-discovery realizes the plug and play feature for the RPR.
To increase or decrease the total bandwidth of an RPR, you can use the LCAS
function, which realizes the dynamic increase and decrease of bandwidth without
affecting the existing services.

Spatial Reuse
On an RPR, the stripping of unicast frames at the destination node realizes the spatial
reuse for ring bandwidth. As shown in Figure 5-11, the bandwidth of a single ring is
1.25 Gbit/s. Traffic 1 sent from Node 1 to Node 4 is stripped from the ring at the
destination Node 4, and thus the bandwidth behind Node 4 is left unused. In this case,
Node 4 is able to send traffic to Node 3 at a 1.25 Gbit/s bandwidth. In this way, the
bandwidth utilization is improved.

Figure 5-11 Spatial reuse


Node 1

Traffic 1
1.25 Gbit/s

Node 2 Dual-ring Node 4


2.5 Gbit/s RPR

Traffic 2
Bandwidth of single ring is 1.25 Gbit/s
1.25Gbit/s
Node 3

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 94 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Fairness Algorithm
The outer ring and the inner ring of an RPR support independent weighted fairness
algorithm. The fairness algorithm ensures the fair access of lower-class B_EIR and C
services. The weight in the fairness algorithm is configurable so that different nodes
can have different access rates. Weights need to be set for a node on the outer ring
and the inner ring separately. In the case of preemptible bandwidth, these two weights
decide the bandwidth at which the node transmits lower-class services on the inner
ring and the outer ring.
As shown in Figure 5-12, the weights of Nodes 2, 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1. On
the outer ring, assume that the preemptible bandwidth that is available for lower-class
services is 1.2 Gbit/s. In this case, the fairness algorithm allocates 400 Mbit/s each for
the lower-class services transmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1.
Figure 5-13 shows a fairness algorithm with different weights, that is, the weights of
Nodes 2, 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1, 3 and 2 respectively. In this case, the
fairness algorithm allocates 200 Mbit/s, 600 Mbit/s, and 400 Mbit/s bandwidths for the
lower-class services transmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1.

Figure 5-12 Fairness algorithm when the weight is 1

Node Weight
3
Node2 1
2 Node3
Node 2 1
Node4 1

Node 3 Node 1
1
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4 Node 6
Traffic Bandwidth
1 400 Mbit/s
Node 5
2 400 Mbit/s
3 400 Mbit/s

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 95 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 5-13 Fairness algorithm when the weights are different

Node Weight
3
Node2 1
2 Node3 3
Node4 2
Node 2
Node 1
Node 3
1
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4 Node 6
Traffic Bandwidth
1 400 Mbit/s
Node 5
2 600 Mbit/s
3 200 Mbit/s

5.2.2 Application
The RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN
services.

EVPL Service
The EVPL service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and
encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the MPLS MartinioE format.
Figure 5-14 illustrates the accessing, forwarding and stripping of a unidirectional
EVPL service. Node 2 adds the Tunnel and VC labels into the packet, and sends the
packet onto the RPR. Node 3 forwards the packet to the destination Node 4, which
then strips the packet.
Figure 5-15 illustrates the EVPL service convergence, in which the traffic classification
is based on port+VLAN so that multiple services can be converged at the GE port of
Node 1.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 96 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 5-14 EVPL service accessing, forwarding and stripping

Node 1

Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
FE/GE FE/GE
Node 2 Node 4

Action Stripping
LSP
Tunnel 100
Action Insertion Node 3 VC 100
Tunnel 100
VC 100
Destination Node 4
Action Forwarding

Figure 5-15 EVPL service convergence

VLAN 2 VLAN 3 Traffic Tunnel VC Destination


Port1+VLAN 2 200 200 Node 2
Port1+VLAN 3 300 300 Node 3
Port1+VLAN 4 400 400 Node 4
VLAN 4 GE

Node 1

FE FE
VLAN 2
Node 2 Node 4 VLAN 4

Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR

Node 3

FE

VLAN 3

EVPLAN Service
The EVPLAN service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and
encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the stack VLAN format. The EVPLAN service
is realized by creating virtual bridges (VBs) in the board. The VB supports the
self-learning of source MAC addresses and the configuration of static MAC routes.
Figure 5-16 shows an example of the EVPLAN service. Port rpr1 is where the packets
are accessed onto the RPR. By address self-learning, the VB of each node
determines the forwarding port and the destination node of the packets. At Node 1, if
the destination MAC address of the packets is A1, the packets are forwarded through

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 97 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Port 1. If the destination address is A2, the packets are forwarded through Port 2. If
the destination address is B1, B2 or C1, the packets are forwarded onto the RPR
through Port rpr1, added with a stack VLAN tag whose value is 100. Node 2 forwards
packets in the same way.

Figure 5-16 RPR EVPLAN service


A2
A1
MAC forwarding table of node 1
MAC Port stack VLAN
Port 2
A1 port 1 none
Port 1
A2 port 2 none
B1 rpr1 100
Node 1 B2 rpr1 100
B1
C1 rpr1 100
Dual-ring
A2
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Port 1
Node 2 Node 4
Port 2
B2
MAC forwarding table of node 2
Node 3 MAC Port stack VLAN
A1 rpr1 100
A2 rpr1 100
B1 port 1 none
Port 1
B2 port 2 none
C1 rpr1 100
C1

5.2.3 Protection
The RPR services of the OptiX OSN 1500 are protected by various protection
schemes.
The protection schemes of the RPR services include:
 Wrapping, steering and wrapping+steering
 LCAS
 RSTP
 Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and
SNCTP

Wrapping
When a failure is detected on the ring, the wrapping function performs an automatic
loopback at the nodes that are adjacent to the failure point, to connect the inner ring
and the outer ring. The protection switching time is less than 50 ms. The advantages
of this protection scheme are enhanced protection speed and minimal loss of data,
and the disadvantage is the waste of bandwidth.
Figure 5-17 illustrates the wrapping protection. The traffic is sent from Node 4, passes
through Nodes 3 and 2 in turn, and finally reaches Node 1. When there is a fiber cut
between Nodes 2 and 3, they perform an automatic loopback to connect the inner ring
and the outer ring, so that the protection is realized.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 98 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 5-17 Wrapping protection


Node 2
Fiber cut
Traffic flow

X Node 1
Node 3

Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR

Node 6
Node 4

Node 5

Steering
In the steering protection, switching is not performed at the failure point. Instead, the
source node sends the traffic to the destination node through a new route that is
generated by the topology auto-discovery protocol. If the number of nodes on the ring
is less than 16, the steering protection switching time is less than 50 ms. The
advantage of this protection scheme is that it does not waste bandwidth. The
disadvantage is that, when the network scale is large, the protection switching speed
is low, and some data is discarded before a new route is generated.
Figure 5-18 illustrates the steering protection. Before a failure occurs on the ring, the
traffic is sent from Node 4, passes through Nodes 3 and 2 in turn, and finally reaches
Node 1, through the outer ring. When there is a fiber cut between Nodes 2 and 3, the
topology auto-discovery protocol discovers a new topology. On the basis of this new
topology, the traffic is sent from Node 4, passes through Nodes 5 and 6 in turn, and
finally reaches Node 1, through the inner ring.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 99 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 5-18 Steering protection


Node 2
Fiber cut
Traffic flow before
switching

X Dual-ring Node 1
Node 3
2.5 Gbit/s RPR

Traffic flow Node 6


Node 4 after switching

Node 5

Wrapping+Steering
In the wrapping+steering protection, when a failure is detected on the ring, the ring
first performs a wrapping switching to ensure the switching speed and decrease the
packet loss. After the topology auto-discovery protocol generates a new ring topology,
the ring performs the steering protection so that the traffic is sent to the destination
through the best route. This reduces the waste of bandwidth.
Figure 5-19 illustrates the wrapping+steering protection. Before a failure occurs on the
ring, the traffic is sent from Node 4, passes through Nodes 3 and 2 in turn, and finally
reaches Node 1, through the outer ring. When there is a fiber cut between Nodes 2
and 3, a wrapping switching is first performed so that Nodes 2 and 3 are automatically
loopbacked. After the topology auto-discovery protocol discovers a new topology, a
steering switching is performed. As a result, the traffic passes through Nodes 5 and 6
in turn, and finally reaches Node 1, through the inner ring.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 100 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 5-19 Wrapping+steering protection


Node 2
Fiber cut
Traffic flow

X Node 1
Node 3

Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR

Node 6
Node 4

Node 5

Node 2

Fiber cut

X Node 1
Node 3 Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR

Traffic flow Node 6


Node 4 after switching

Node 5

LCAS
The LCAS function adds and reduces the bandwidth dynamically, and protects the
bandwidth.
For details about the LCAS, refer to section 5.1.3 Protection.

RSTP
The RPR boards support the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). The RSTP realizes
link protection by restructuring the topology. When the RSTP is started, it logically
modifies the network topology to prevent a broadcast storm.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 101 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP


At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected when the MSP,
SNCP, SNCMP, or SNCTP scheme is used.

5.3 ATM Features


This section describes the functions, application and protection of the ATM features of
the OptiX OSN 1500.

5.3.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides four types of ATM processing boards, which are ADL4,
ADQ1, IDL4, and IDQ1.
An ADL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an N1ADQ1
board can access and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the
N1PL3/N1PL3A/N1PD3 board, the ADL4 or ADQ1 board can access and process E3
ATM services.
Table 5-8 lists the functions of the ADL4 and ADQ1 boards.

Table 5-8 Functions of ADL4 and ADQ1


Function ADL4 ADQ1
Front panel 1 x STM-4 4 x STM-1
interface
Optical interface S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and
specification Ve-1.2
Connector type LC
Optical module SFP
type
E3 ATM interface Accesses 12 x E3 services by using the N1PD3, N1PL3, or
N1PL3A board.
IMA Not supported
Maximum uplink 8 VC-4, or 12 VC-3 + 4 VC-4
bandwidth
ATM switching 1.2 Gbit/s
capability
Mapping mode VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-xv (x≤4)
Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR
Number of ATM 2048
connections
Traffic type and IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0
QoS

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 102 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Function ADL4 ADQ1

Supported ATM Spatial multicast and logical multicast


multicast
connections
ATM protection Unidirectional or bidirectional 1+1, 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring
(ITU-T I.630)
OAM function AIS, RDI, LB (Loopback), CC (Continuity Check)
(ITU-T I.610)

An IDL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an IDQ1 board
can access and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the E1
processing board, the IDL4 or IDQ1 board can access and process IMA services.
Table 5-9 lists the functions of the IDL4 and IDQ1 boards.

Table 5-9 Functions of IDL4 and IDQ1


Function N1IDL4 N1IDQ1

Front panel interface 1 x STM-4 4 x STM-1


Optical interface S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and Ve-1.2
specification
Connector type LC
Optical module type SFP
E3 ATM interface Not supported
IMA (compliant with Accesses and processes IMA services when working with the E1
ATM Forum IMA 1.1 processing board N1PQ1, N1PQM, or N2PQ1.
standards) Supports a maximum of 63 IMA E1 services.
Supports the mapping of a maximum of 16 IMA groups to the ATM port.
Each IMA group supports 1–32 E1 services. Supports the mapping of a
maximum of 16 E1 links (which are not in any IMA group) to the ATM port.
Supports a maximum of 226 ms of IMA multipath delay.
Maximum uplink 8 VC-4, or 63 VC-12 + 7 VC-4
bandwidth
ATM switching 1 Gbit/s
capability
Mapping mode VC-12, VC-4, or VC-4-xv (X≤4)
Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR
Number of ATM 2048
connections
Traffic type and QoS IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 103 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Function N1IDL4 N1IDQ1

Supported ATM Spatial multicast and logical multicast


multicast connections
ATM protection (ITU-T Unidirectional or bidirectional 1+1, 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring
I.630)
OAM function (ITU-T AIS, RDI, LB (Loopback), CC (continuity check)
I.610)
Board level 1+1 Supported, with switching time less than 1s
protection

5.3.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the application of several types of ATM services.

Supported Services and Traffic Types


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and UBR services, but does
not support ABR services.
 The CBR services apply to voice services, and video services and circuit
emulation services of a constant bit rate. These services require guaranteed
transmission bandwidth and latency.
 The rt-VBR services apply to audio and video services of a variable bit rate.
 The nrt-VBR services are mainly used for data transmission.
 The UBR services are generally used for LAN emulation and file transfer.
In terms of the supported services and traffic types, the OptiX OSN 1500 meets IETF
RFC2514, ATM Forum TM 4.0, and ATM Forum UNI 3.1 Recommendations. See
Table 5-10.

Table 5-10 ATM service types and traffic types


No. Traffic Type Service Type Parameter

1 atmNoTrafficDescriptor UBR None


2 atmNoClpNoScr UBR.1 Clp01Pcr
CBR Clp01Pcr
3 atmClpNoTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr
4 atmClpTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr
5 atmNoClpScr nrt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs
6 atmClpNoTaggingScr nrt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs
7 atmClpTaggingScr nrt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs
8 atmClpTransparentNoScr CBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 104 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

No. Traffic Type Service Type Parameter

9 atmClpTransparentScr rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs,


Cdvt
10 atmNoClpTaggingNoScr UBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
11 atmNoClpNoScrCdvt UBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
CBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
12 atmNoClpScrCdvt rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs,
Cdvt
13 atmClpNoTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
14 atmClpTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt

Application of Bandwidth Exclusive ATM Services


When the bandwidth is not shared, ATM services are processed by the ATM service
processing board, at the ATM layer of only the source and sink NEs. On intermediate
NEs, only SDH timeslot pass-through is performed, without ATM layer processing. In
this case, each ATM service exclusively occupies a VC-3 or VC-4 path. At the central
node, the ATM services are converged to an STM-1 or STM-4 optical port for output.
As shown in Figure 5-20, the 34 Mbit/s ATM services of NE1 and NE3 exclusively
occupy a VC-3 bandwidth each. The 155 Mbit/s ATM service of NE2 exclusively
occupies a VC-4 bandwidth. Only the SDH timeslot pass-through is performed at NE3.
After the three services reach the central station NE4, they are converged by the ATM
board and are output through the 622 Mbit/s optical interface on the front panel.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 105 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 5-20 Application of bandwidth exclusive ATM services

DSLAM
34M ATM
Traffic
Service
Convergence
NE 1

2.5 Gbit/s SDH


155M ATM Ring 622M ATM
Traffic Traffic
NE 2 NE 4

Router
DSLAM

NE 3

34M ATM
Traffic
DSLAM

Application of Bandwidth Shared ATM Services


The VR-Ring and VC-Ring realize the bandwidth sharing and the statistical
multiplexing for ATM services. The ATM services on each NE share the same VC
(VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-xv) path and are processed at the ATM layer of all NEs.
As shown in Figure 5-21, NE1 accesses E3 ATM traffic from the tributary board and
sends it to the ATM board for ATM switching and protection configuration (1+1 or 1:1).
Then, after the traffic is encapsulated into VC-4-xv, it is sent to the line by the
cross-connect board. NE2 accesses STM-1 ATM traffic from the optical interface, and
then performs the ATM switching and protection configuration. At the same time, the
ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped at NE2 for ATM layer processing. Then, the locally
accessed traffic and the traffic from the upstream are encapsulated into the same
VC-4-xv and sent to the downstream NE. The processing at NE3 and NE4 is similar.
One VP-Ring/VC-Ring has a maximum bandwidth of 300 Mbit/s.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 106 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 5-21 VP-Ring/VC-Ring


DSLAM

The ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped to


the NE2, and then sent to VP/VC-Ring 34M ATM
after converged with local service. NE 1 Traffic

155M ATM Traffic NE 4 Route


VC4-Xv VP/
r
VC-Ring
NE 2 622M ATM
DSLAM Traffic

NE 3 34M ATM
Traffic
DSLAM

Application of IMA Services


The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology is used to demultiplex an ATM
integrated cell flow into several lower rate links. At the other end, the lower rate links
are multiplexed to recover the original integrated cell flow.
The IMA technology is applicable when ATM cells are transmitted through an interface
of the E1 rate or other rates. The IMA technology only provides a path, and does not
process service types and ATM cells. The signals at the ATM layer and a higher layer
are transparently transmitted.
Figure 5-22 illustrates the IMA service networking.

Figure 5-22 IMA service networking


RNC

NE1

T2000
40km
25km

NE2 NE4
NodeB 1 STM-16 two-fiber
bidirectional
MSP ring NodeB 4

35km 30km

NE3
NodeB 2

NodeB 3

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 107 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

5.3.3 Protection
The ATM services of the OptiX OSN 1500 are protected at several layers.
The protections that are available are as follows:
 ATM layer protections
 Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and
SNCTP
 1+1 board level protection for IMA boards

ATM Layer Protections


Compliant with ITU-T I.630, the ATM layer, protections are classified in different ways,
as listed in Table 5-11. You can select a combination of the following protection types
as required, for example, 1+1 bidirectional non-revertive protection.

Table 5-11 Classification of ATM protection


Classification Scheme Protection Type

Bridging function 1+1 protection 1:1 protection


Switching direction Unidirectional protection Bidirectional protection
Connection level VPC protection VCC protection
Protection domain Trail protection SNCP, SNCMP, SNCTP
Revertive mode Revertive protection Non-revertive protection
Protected object Single connection Group connection
protection protection

Optical Transmission Layer Protections


The ATM service is also protected by the self-healing network at the optical
transmission layer, where the protection schemes include MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and
SNCTP. You can set the hold-off time for the ATM protection switching. In this way,
when network impairment occurs, the MSP, SNCP , SNCMP or SNCTP at the optical
transmission layer performs the switching first, thus achieving the protection of the
working ATM service (in this case, the protection switching at the ATM layer is not
performed).

1+1 Board Level Protection for IMA Boards


The IDQ1 and IDL4 boards support the 1+1 board level protection. For the
configuration of 1+1 board level protection, the IDQ1 and IDL4 boards must be
inserted in paired slots.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 108 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

5.4 SAN Features


The OptiX OSN 1500 provides a multiservice transparent transmission processing
board, N1MST4, to access and transparently transmit FC, FICON, ESCON and
DVB-ASI services.
The detailed description of the N1MST4 board is as follows:
 The N1MST4 board provides four independent multiservice access ports. All the
port connectors are of the LC (SFP) type.
 Using all the four ports, the N1MST4 board supports 4 x FC (FC100/FICON and
FC200) services, with the total bandwidth of not more than 2.5 Gbit/s. The board
also supports the full-rate transmission of FC services, which means that one
FC200 service or two FC100 services are supported.
 The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the SDH
side. FC100 supports 3000 km, and FC200 supports 1500 km.
 The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the client
side. FC100 supports 40 km, and FC200 supports 20 km.
 Using all the four ports, the N1MST4 board supports 4 x ESCON or 4 x DVB-ASI
services.
 All services are encapsulated in the GFP-T format, which is compliant with ITU-T
G.7041. All services are mapped into VC-4 or VC-4-xc (x=4, 8, or 16).
Table 5-12 lists the service types and bit rates provided by the N1MST4 board.

Table 5-12 Service types and bit rates provided by N1MST4


Service Type Bit Rate Remarks

FC100/FICON 1062.5 Mbit/s SAN service


FC200 2125 Mbit/s SAN service
ESCON 200 Mbit/s SAN service
DVB-ASI 270 Mbit/s Video service

5.5 DDN Features


This section describes the functions and application of the DDN features of the OptiX
OSN 1500.

5.5.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 1500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12
interface board to access and process DDN services.
 The N1DX1 board processes 8 x 64 kbit/s services and eight framed E1 services
and realizes the service convergence. The N1DX1 also cross-connects N x 64
kbit/s signals at the system side.
 The N1DXA board cross-connects N x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 109 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

 The N1DM12 board accesses framed E1 and N x 64 kbit/s services when it works
with the N1DX1 board.
Table 5-13 lists the functions and features of the DDN boards.

Table 5-13 Functions and features of N1DX1 (N1DM12) and N1DXA


Board Feature N1DX1 (N1DM12) N1DXA
Processing Processes 8 x 64 kbit/s and eight framed Cross-connects 63 x 64 kbit/s signals
capability E1 services, and cross-connects 48 x 64 at the system side.
kbit/s signals at the system side.
Bandwidth at 48 x E1. 63 x E1.
SDH side
Interface N x 64 bit/s interface: RS449, EIA530, None.
specifications EIA530-A, V.35, V.24 and X.21.Framed
E1 interface: CRC4 and non-CRC4.
Interface 75 ohms or 120 ohms. None.
impedance
Connector type The connectors are on the DM12 board. None.
The DB28 connector is used for N x 64
bit/s signals, and the DB44 connector is
used for framed E1 signals.
Protection Supports 1:N TPS protection with the Not supported.
switching time being less than 50 ms.
Loopback Supports inloop and outloop for all the Supports inloop and outloop for all
ports. the ports.
PRBS self-test Supported. Not supported.
Alarm and A large number of alarms and A large number of alarms and
performance performance events are provided to performance events are provided to
facilitate the equipment management and facilitate the equipment management
maintenance. and maintenance.

5.5.2 Application
When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX
OSN 1500, the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services.
The N1DX1 and the N1DXA boards are mainly used for the following functions, so
various services such as RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21 and framed E1
can be accessed to a transmission network.
 Point-to-point transmission for video conferences and routers
 Point-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers
 Multipoint-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers
 Access and convergence of multipoint routers

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 110 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

The N1DX1 and N1DXA boards are applicable to DDN private networks for
small-sized and medium-sized enterprises, government agencies, and banking and
security service halls.

5.5.3 Protection
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides TPS protection for DDN services.
In TPS protection, when any working board is faulty or not in position, the DDN
services are switched to the protection board. This ensures the reliable operation of
the equipment.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports one group of 1:N (N≤2) TPS protection for the N1DX1
boards.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 111 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

6 DCN Features

6.1 Overview
The element management system (EMS) sets up communication with NEs through a
data communication network (DCN), to manage and maintain these NEs.
In a DCN, the EMS and NEs are regarded as network nodes, which can be connected
through Ethernet or physical data communication channels (DCCs).
In practical networking, the EMS and NEs can be located on different floors in a
building, in different buildings, or even in different cities. Therefore, the connection
between the EMS and NEs usually requires an external DCN that consists of
equipment such as LAN switch and routers. On the other hand, the DCN among NEs
is referred to as an internal DCN. This section describes the internal DCN that
consists of SDH NEs. See Figure 6-1.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 113 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 6-1 DCN network

T2000

IP/OSI External DCN


DCN

HW ECC or
IP/OSI over
DCC

Internal DCN

OptiX optical transmission equipment

LAN switch

6.1.1 Background of SDH DCN


With the development of network scale, OAM of a network becomes more and more
difficult. A stable and robust DCN management network helps reduce the OAM cost.
In a DCN, the DCC bytes in SDH overheads are used as physical channels for DCN
management. The customer does not need to set up private DCN channels so the
network construction cost is considerably reduced. For a DCN, the SDH provides the
following bandwidth:
 By using the D1–D3 bytes in SDH regenerator section overheads (RSOH), the
SDH provides a 192 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN.
 By using the D4–D12 bytes in SDH multiplex section overheads (MSOH), the
SDH provides a 576 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN.
 By using the D1–D12 bytes in SDH section overheads, the SDH provides a 768
kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN.
Figure 6-2 shows the positions of DCC bytes in SDH overheads.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 114 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 6-2 Positions of DCC bytes in SDH overheads

* *
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0

B1 E1 F1 RSOH
D1 D2 D3

AU PTR

B2 B2 B2 K1 K2

D4 D5 D6

D7 D8 D9 MSOH
D10 D11 D12

S1 M1 E2

6.1.2 SDH DCN Solutions


The OptiX OSN 1500 provides multiple DCN solutions.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the DCN networking by using the following protocols:
 HWECC
 TCP/IP (IP over DCC)
 OSI (OSI over DCC)
The HWECC protocol is a private protocol developed by Huawei to support the DCN
networking of OptiX equipment. The HWECC protocol features easy configuration and
application. As it is a private protocol, HWECC protocol does not meet the
management requirements for hybrid networking by using the equipment from other
vendors.
The TCP/IP and OSI protocols are standard communication protocols that solve the
management issue in the case of hybrid networking with equipment from other
vendors. These two protocols can also be used in a network that consists of only
Huawei equipment.

When OptiX equipment is interconnected with other vendors’ equipment that does not support
the TCP/IP and OSI standard communication protocols, Huawei provides the transparent
transmission function for DCC bytes, and provides relevant Ethernet service channels to
transparently transmit the OAM information.

6.1.3 DCC Resource Allocation Modes


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports different DCC resource allocation modes.
Table 6-1 lists the DCC resource allocation modes supported by the OptiX OSN 1500.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 115 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Table 6-1 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 1500


DCC Allocation Q2CXL/R1CXL Q3CXL

Channel type Supports the D1–D3 and D4–D12 channel types.


Operation Mode 1 Supports 40 D1–D3 Supports 80 D1–D3
mode channels. channels.
Mode 2 Supports 10 D1–D3 Supports 20 D1–D3
channels. channels.
Supports 10 D4–D12 Supports 20 D4–D12
channels. channels.
Mode 3 Supports 22 D1–D3 Supports 44 D1–D3
channels. channels.
Supports 6 D4–D12 Supports 12 D4–D12
channels. channels.
Mode 4 Supports 28 D1–D3 Supports 32 D1–D3
channels. channels.
Supports 4 D4–D12
channels.
Protocol type Supports HWECC, IP and OSI protocols.
Default mode Mode 1

The Q3CXL/R1CXL board can also provide two 2 Mbit/s external clock interfaces,
which can be used to transparently transmit DCC information. For details, refer to 2.20
DCC Transparent Transmission Through External Clock Interfaces.

6.2 HWECC
The equipment supports the HWECC protocol, which is a private protocol defined by
Huawei.

6.2.1 Features
The HWECC protocol is used to transmit OAM information among Huawei OptiX
equipment.
In hybrid networking with equipment from other vendors, the HWECC protocol is not
able to identify the OAM information from other vendors’ equipment, but can
transparently transmit such OAM information. By using the existing DCC resources,
the user is able to meet the requirements of a centralized management of equipment.
The HWECC protocol has the following features:
 The protocol provides a flexible networking environment.
 NEs can be connected through optical interfaces or Ethernet interfaces for
embedded control channel (ECC) communication.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 116 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

 The protocol provides transparent transmission for the OAM information from
other vendors' equipment.

In the OptiX OSN 1500, each slot supports a maximum of eight ECC channels.

6.2.2 Application
The HWECC protocol has three typical applications depending on the networking.

OAM Information Transmitted by OptiX OSN Equipment Only


When OAM information is transmitted only among the OptiX OSN equipment, a
gateway NE is required for the communication with the T2000. The T2000 is
connected to the gateway NE through the Qx interface and tests, manages and
maintains the entire network.
The T2000 system helps improve the network service quality, lower the maintenance
cost, and ensure a reasonable use of network resources. A non-gateway NE is
connected to the gateway NE through ECC, to realize the transmission of the OAM
information.
In some cases, extended ECC communication through Ethernet interfaces is also
available among NEs. See Figure 6-3.

Figure 6-3 Networking with extended ECC

N
HUB1 GNE1 NE6 HUB2 NE7 NE12
PC E6

NE2 NE5 NE8 NE11

NE3 NE4 NE9 NE10

Network cable Subnet1 Subnet2


Fiber

OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by OptiX OSN Equipment


When there is OptiX OSN equipment between third-party equipment, the OAM
information of the third-party equipment can be transparently transmitted through
D4–D12 bytes of the OptiX OSN equipment. See Figure 6-4.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 117 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 6-4 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (ECC)

D4-D12

D1-D3 Transparent D1-D3


transmission
Third party Third party
equipment equipment

OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by Third-Party Equipment


When there is third-party equipment between OptiX OSN equipment, the OAM
information of the OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted through
D4-D12 bytes of the equipment. See Figure 6-5.

Figure 6-5 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (ECC)

Third party D4-D12 Third party


equipment equipment

Transparent
transmission

D1-D3 D1-D3

6.3 IP Over DCC


The equipment supports the IP over DCC protocol.

6.3.1 Features
The OptiX OSN equipment can transmit network management information by using
the IP over DCC protocol.
The IP over DCC protocol has the following features:
 The TCP/IP protocol realizes the compatibility with the equipment from other
vendors. In this case, the network management is simplified.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 118 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

 The Layer 3 functions of protocol stacks are adopted. In this case, additional
overheads or server trails are not required for the transmission of the OAM
information of other vendors’ equipment.
 The protocol provides flexible networking modes.
 Several application layer protocols are supported.

6.3.2 Application
The IP over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.

OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by Third-Party Equipment


When there is third-party equipment between OptiX OSN equipment, the OAM
information of the OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted by the
third-party equipment, by using the IP over DCC protocol. See Figure 6-6.

Figure 6-6 OAM information transparently transmitted by the third-party equipment (IP)

Third party
equipment

IP over DCC Third party


equipment

OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by OptiX OSN Equipment


When there is OptiX OSN equipment between third-party equipment, the OAM
information of the third-party equipment can be transparently transmitted by the OptiX
OSN equipment, by using the IP over DCC protocol. See Figure 6-7.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 119 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 6-7 OAM information transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment (IP)

Third party Third party


equipment equipment

IP over DCC

Third party
equipment

Third party
equipment

6.4 OSI Over DCC


The equipment supports the OSI over DCC protocol.

6.4.1 Features
The OSI over DCC protocol is used for hybrid networking between the OptiX OSN
equipment and other optical network equipment that supports OSI over DCC.
The OSI over DCC protocol has the following features:
 In a transmission network that consists of equipment from different vendors, the
OSI over DCC protocol enables the transparent transmission of OAM information
at the network layer, and thus provides a more flexible networking.
 The user does not need to set up additional DCN channels. The existing DCC
resources realize the centralized management of equipment from different
vendors.

6.4.2 Application
The OSI over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.

OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by Third-Party Equipment


When there is third-party equipment between OptiX OSN equipment, the OAM
information of the OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted by
third-party equipment, by using the OSI over DCC protocol.
As shown in Figure 6-8, Huawei equipment is located at the network edges, and the
equipment from other vendors is located in the backbone network. The OAM
information between the T2000 and the OptiX OSN equipment needs to be forwarded

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 120 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

by the equipment from other vendors. In this case, each subnet that consists of the
Huawei equipment must have a minimum of one gateway NE.

Figure 6-8 OAM information transparently transmitted by the third-party equipment (OSI)

OSI Third party


protocol equipment
stack
OSI
protocol
stack
OSI over DCC
Third party
equipment

OSI
protocol
stack

OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by OptiX OSN Equipment


When there is OptiX OSN equipment between third-party equipment, the OAM
information of the third-party equipment can be transparently transmitted by the OptiX
OSN equipment, by using the OSI over DCC protocol.
As shown in Figure 6-9, the Huawei equipment is located in the backbone network,
and the equipment from other vendors is located at the network edges. The OAM
information between the network management system and the equipment of other
vendors needs to be forwarded by the Huawei equipment.

In actual application, a network cannot always be divided in this manner. A more common
hybrid networking is that the equipment from different vendors coexists at the core layer and the
peripheral layer.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 121 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 6-9 OAM information transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment
(OSI)

Third party Third party


equipment equipment
OSI protocol stack

OSI
protocol
OSI over DCC stack

Third party
equipment

OSI protocol Third party


equipment
stack

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 122 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

7 ASON Features

7.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies


The automatic discovery of the topologies includes the automatic discovery of the
control links and TE links.

7.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links


The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE
protocol.
When the fiber connection is complete in an ASON network, each ASON NE uses
the OSPF protocol to discover the control links and then floods the information about
its own control links to the entire network. See Figure 7-1. As a result, each NE
obtains the information of the control links in the entire network and also obtains the
information about the network-wide control topology. The following figure shows the
details. Each ASON NE then computes the shortest route to any ASON NE and writes
these routes into the route forwarding table, which is used for the signaling RSVP to
transmit and receive packets.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 123 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 7-1 Auto-discovery of control links

ASON domain

When the fiber connection in the entire network is complete, ASON NEs automatically
discover the network-wide control topology and report the topology information to the
management system for real-time display. See Figure 7-2.

Figure 7-2 Management of control topology

R1 R4

R2

R3

: ASON NE
: User equipment

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 124 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

7.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links


The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE
protocol.
After an ASON NE creates a control channel between neighboring NEs through LMP,
the TE link verification can be started. Each ASON NE floods its own TE links to the
entire network through OSPF-TE. Each NE then gets the network-wide TE links, that
is, the network-wide resource topology.
ASON software detects change in the resource topology in real time, including the
deletion and addition of links, and the change in the link parameters, and then reports
the change to T2000, which performs a real-time refresh.
As shown in Figure 7-3, if one TE link is cut, the NM updates the resource topology
displayed on the NM in real time.

Figure 7-3 TE link auto-discovery

R1 R4

R2

R3

: ASON NE

: User equipment

7.2 End-to-End Service Configuration


The ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration, which is very
convenient.
The ASON supports both SDH permanent connections and end-to-end ASON
services. To configure an ASON service, you only need to specify its source node,
sink node, bandwidth requirement, and protection level. Service routing and
cross-connection at intermediate nodes are all automatically completed by the
network. You can also set explicit node, excluded node, explicit link and excluded link
to constrain the service routing.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 125 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Compared with the service configuration of SDH networks, it fully utilizes the routing
and signaling functions of the ASON NEs and thus it is convenient to configure
services.
For example, consider the configuration of a 155 Mbit/s ASON service between A and
I in Figure 7-4. The network automatically finds the A-D-E-I route and configures
cross-connection at nodes A, D, E and I. Although there is more than one route from A
to I, the network calculates the best route according to the configured algorithm. It is
assumed that A-D-E-I is the best route.
The service is created as follows:
 Choose the bandwidth granularity.
 Choose the server level.
 Choose the source node.
 Choose the sink node.
 Create the service.

Figure 7-4 End-to-end service configuration

R1 R4
E

I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2

R3

: ASON NE

: User equipment

7.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration


The ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and
network security.
As a main networking mode of ASON, mesh features high flexibility and scalability.
Compared with the traditional SDH networking mode, the mesh networking does not
need to reserve 50% bandwidth. Thus, it can save bandwidth resources to satisfy
increasingly large bandwidth demand. In addition, this networking mode also provides
more than one recovery route for each services so it can best utilize the network
resources and enhance the network security.
As shown in Figure 7-5, when the C-G link fails, to restore the service, the network
calculates another route from D to H and creates a new LSP to transmit the service.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 126 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 7-5 Trail restoration

R1 R4
E

I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2

R3

: ASON NE

: User equipment

7.4 ASON Clock Tracing


ASON NEs support both the traditional clock tracing mode and the ASON clock
tracing mode. In an ASON domain, some or all ASON NEs can be set with the ASON
clock tracing mode. In this way, these ASON NEs form an ASON clock subnet.
In an ASON clock subnet, each ASON NE automatically traces the best clock source.
The clock is then automatically traced and switched. In this way, clock interlock is
avoided. In addition, the clock configuration is simplified. For an ASON domain with
many ASON NEs, several ASON clock subnets should be created if more than 20
ASON NEs are on the clock tracing link in a clock subnet. Each ASON clock subnet
generates its own clock tracing relation to trace the primary source in the local subnet.
In each ASON clock subnet, the change of primary source and link does not affect the
clock tracing relation in other ASON clock subnets. Generally, one ASON clock subnet
is created in one ASON domain.

Advantages of the ASON Clock Tracing


The ASON clock tracing has the following advantages.
 Simple configuration: For one ASON clock subnet, only the primary clock need be
created to realize auto-tracing and auto-switching of the clock.
 Auto-tracing and auto-switching: In an ASON clock subnet, the clock has the
auto-tracing and auto-switching features.
 The ASON tracing avoids the clock interlock.

Clock Protection Protocol


To realize the ASON clock tracing, all ASON NEs within the ASON clock subnet must
start the standard SSM protocol.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 127 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Primary Reference Clock Source


Within the ASON clock subnet, the ASON software automatically sets the clock
tracing relation. At the edge of an ASON clock subnet, the external clock source, or
internal clock source of edge NEs should be manually set as the primary reference
clock source for the ASON clock subnet. The following clock sources can be set as
the primary clock reference source.
 Line clock source
 External clock source
 Internal clock source of edge NEs
For one ASON clock subnet, several primary reference clock sources can be set. The
ASON clock subnet, however, traces only one of these primary reference clock
sources. The other clock sources back up the traced clock source. When the selected
primary reference clock source fails, the entire subnet automatically traces another
backup primary reference clock source. In this way, a new clock tracing tree is
established. A priority should be set for the primary reference clock source.
As shown in Figure 7-6, in an ASON clock subnet, primary and secondary clock
sources are configured at NE A and NE B respectively. Other ASON NEs in the ASON
clock subnet automatically create clock tracing trees by computation. In this way, the
entire subnet traces the primary BITS and all clocks in the subnet keep synchronous.
When the primary BITS fails, each ASON NE creates the clock tracing tree by
re-computation. In this way, the entire subnet traces the secondary BITS and all
clocks in the subnet keep synchronous.

Figure 7-6 ASON clock subnet

BITS BITS

Primary base B Standby base


clock source clock source
A

:ASON NE
: BITS

Interfacing Mode
By default, the ASON software automatically creates the clock tracing tree according
to the network topology. In this way, each ASON NE then can automatically trace an
available clock source. If necessary, set the interfacing mode of some optical

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 128 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

interfaces to the clock quality not detected mode to adjust the clock tracing tree. In this
way, these optical interfaces are excluded from the options of the clock tracing
sources for ASON NEs.

Regeneration Source
A regeneration source is a device used to regenerate clock signals. If an NE is
configured with such a device, the system tracing clock of the NE is strengthened and
the quality of the out-link clock is increased. During the computation for creating the
clock tracing tree, the clock signals strengthened by the regeneration source are
selected with priority.
For configuration of the regeneration source, 2M input and output interfaces are used.
An NE receives the upstream clock signals and outputs them to the regeneration
device. The regenerated clock signals then return to the NE through the 2M input
interface. The clock then works as the system tracing clock for the NE. In this way,
clock signals are strengthened and the line clock signals output from the NE are also
strengthened.

Clock Tracing Relation in the ASON Clock Subnet


The clock tracing relation in the ASON clock subnet is as follows:
 The ASON clock subnet take priority to trace the primary source of the highest
clock quality.
 If multiple primary reference clock sources are of the same quality, the ASON
clock subnet traces the primary reference clock source of the highest priority.
 If multiple primary reference clock sources are of the same quality and priority,
the ASON clock subnet traces the clock source in the trail with the least hops to
generate multiple clock tracing trees. In this way, too long clock tracing trail is
avoided.
 If all the primary reference clock sources are invalid, the ASON clock subnet
traces the internal clock source with the smallest node ID. Thus, clocks in the
entire network are synchronized.

Hybrid Network of the ASON Clock Subnet and Traditional Clock Subnet
If the traditional clock subnet works in the SSM disabled mode, you should configure
the quality and priority of the primary reference clock source in the ASON clock
subnet.
If the traditional clock network works in the standard SSM mode, you should configure
only the quality of the primary reference clock source in the ASON clock subnet.
If the traditional clock subnet works in the extended SSM mode, you should only
modify the subnet to the standard SSM mode, and then form a hybrid network with the
ASON clock subnet.

Modifying the Traditional ASON Subnet to the ASON Clock Subnet


If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the SSM
disabled mode, you should create the ASON clock subnet and configure the quality
and priority of the primary reference clock source.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 129 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the standard
SSM mode, you should directly create the ASON clock subnet and configure the
priority of the primary reference clock source.
If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the extended
SSM mode, you should modify the extended SSM mode to the standard SSM mode.
Then you should create the ASON clock subnet and configure the priority of the
primary reference clock source.

7.5 SLA
The ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients.
The service level agreement (SLA) is used to classify services according to the
service protection, as listed in Table 7-1.

Table 7-1 Service level


Service Protection and Implementation Switching and
Restoration Scheme Means Rerouting Time

Diamond Protection and SNCP and Switching time < 50ms


service restoration rerouting Rerouting time < 2 s
Gold service Protection and MSP and rerouting Switching time < 50ms
restoration Rerouting time < 2 s
Silver Restoration Rerouting Rerouting time < 2 s
service
Copper No protection - -
service No restoration
Iron service Preemptable MSP -

Table 7-2 lists details of the TE links used by ASON services.

Table 7-2 TE links used by ASON services


Service Level Working Resource Protection Resource Non-Protection
of TE Link of TE Link Resource of TE Link

Diamond Service creation Not used Not used Used


service
Service Not used Used when the Used with the priority
rerouting resource is not enough
Service Not used Not used Used
optimization

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 130 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Service Level Working Resource Protection Resource Non-Protection


of TE Link of TE Link Resource of TE Link

Gold Service creation Used with the Not used Used when the
service priority resource is not enough
Service Used with the Used when the Used when the
rerouting priority resource is not enough resource is not enough
Service Used with the Not used Used when the
optimization priority resource is not enough
Silver Service creation Not used Not used Used
service
Service Not used Used when the Used with the priority
rerouting resource is not enough
Service Not used Not used Used
optimization
Copper Service creation Not used Not used Used
service
Service Not used Not used Used
optimization
Iron Service creation Not used Used with the priority Used when the
service resource is not enough

7.6 Diamond Services


Diamond services have the best protection ability. When there are enough resources
in the network, diamond services provide a permanent 1+1 protection. Diamond
services are applicable to voice and data services, VIP private line, such as banking,
security and aviation.
A diamond service is a service with 1+1 protection from the source node to the sink
node. It is also called a 1+1 service. For a diamond service, there are two different
LSPs available between the source node and the sink node. The two LSPs should be
as separate as possible. One is the working LSP and the other is the protection LSP.
The same service is transmitted to the working LSP and the protection LSP at the
same time. If the working LSP is normal, the sink node receives the service from the
working LSP; otherwise, from the protection LSP.
Figure 7-7 shows a diamond service.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 131 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 7-7 Diamond Services


Working LSP

R1 R4
E I

D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2

R3

Protection LSP : ASON NE

: User equipment

There are three types of diamond services.


 Permanent 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered once an LSP fails.
 Rerouting 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered only when both LSPs fail.
 Non-rerouting diamond service: rerouting is never triggered.
Table 7-3 lists the attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond service.
Table 7-4 lists the attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service.
Table 7-5 lists the attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service.

Table 7-3 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services


Attribute Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service

Requirements for Sufficient non-protection resources are available between


creation the source node and the sink node.
Protection and  If the resources are sufficient, two LSPs are always
restoration available for a permanent 1+1 diamond service. One is
the active LSP and the other is the standby LSP.
 If the resources are not sufficient, one LSP can still be
reserved for a permanent 1+1 diamond service to ensure
the service survivability.
Rerouting  Supports rerouting lockout.
 Supports rerouting priority.
 Supports three rerouting policies:
Use existing trails whenever possible
Do not use existing trails whenever possible
Best route

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 132 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Attribute Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service

Revertive  Revertive services support reverting to the original route


automatically.
 Non-revertive services support reverting to the original
route manually.
Service migration  Supports migration between permanent SNCP
connections and diamond services.
 Supports migration between diamond services and silver
services.
 Supports migration between diamond services and
copper services.
Service switching Supports manual switching.
Service optimization Supports service optimization.
Service association Does not support service association.
ASON server trail Does not support diamond ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI,
rerouting AU_AIS

Table 7-4 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service


Attribute Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service

Requirements for Sufficient non-protection resources are available between


creation the source node and the sink node
Protection and  When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched.
restoration Rerouting is not triggered.
 When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the
standby LSP for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.
 When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting
is triggered to create a new LSP to restore services.
Rerouting  Supports rerouting lockout.
 Supports rerouting priority.
 Supports three rerouting policies:
Use existing trails whenever possible
Do not use existing trails whenever possible
Best route
Revertive  Revertive services support reverting to the original route
automatically.
 Non-revertive services support reverting to the original
route manually.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 133 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Attribute Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service

Service migration  Supports migration between permanent SNCP


connections and diamond services.
 Supports migration between diamond services and silver
services.
 Supports migration between diamond services and copper
services.
Service switching Supports manual switching.
Service optimization Supports service optimization.
Service association Does not support service association.
ASON server trail Does not support diamond ASON server trails
Alarms to trigger R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI,
rerouting AU_AIS

Table 7-5 Attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service


Attribute Non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service

Requirements for Sufficient non-protection resources are available between


creation the source node and the sink node
Protection and  When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the
restoration standby LSP for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.
 When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched.
Rerouting is not triggered.
 When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting
is not triggered.
Service migration  Supports migration between permanent SNCP
connections and diamond services.
 Supports migration between diamond services and silver
services.
 Supports migration between diamond services and copper
services.
Service switching Supports manual switching.
Service optimization Supports service optimization.
Service association Does not support service association.
ASON server trail Does not support diamond ASON server trails.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 134 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

7.7 Gold Services


Gold services are applicable to voice and significant data services. Compared with
diamond services, gold services have greater bandwidth utilization.
A gold service needs only one LSP. This LSP must use working resource of TE links
or non-protection resource of TE links. When a fiber on the path of a gold service is
cut, the ASON triggers MSP switching to protect the service at first. If the multiplex
section protection fails, the ASON triggers rerouting to restore the service.
As shown in Figure 7-8, a gold service can be configured from A to I.

Figure 7-8 Gold services

R1 R4
E MSP
I
D
F
MSP
C
A
B MSP
H
G
R2

R3

: ASON NE

: User equipment

Table 7-6 lists the attributes of gold services.

Table 7-6 Attributes of gold services


Attribute Gold Service

Requirements for Sufficient working resources or non-protection resources


creation are available between the source node and the sink node.
Multiplex section  Supports using the working resources of a 1:1 linear
protection multiplex section protection chain to create gold services.
 Supports using the working resources of a two-fiber
bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create
gold services.
 Supports using the working resources of a four-fiber
bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create
gold services.
Protection and When a fiber is cut for the first time, MS switching is
restoration performed to protect services. When MS switching fails,
rerouting is then triggered to restore services.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 135 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Attribute Gold Service

Rerouting  Supports rerouting lockout.


 Supports rerouting priority.
 Supports three rerouting policies:
Use existing trails whenever possible
Do not use existing trails whenever possible
Best route
Revertive  Revertive services support reverting to the original route
automatically.
 Non-revertive services support reverting to the original
route manually.
Preset restoring trail Supports setting the preset restoring trail.
Service migration  Supports migration between permanent connections and
gold services.
 Supports migration between gold services and silver
services.
 Supports migration between gold services and copper
services.
Service switching Supports manual switching.
Service optimization Supports service optimization.
ASON server trail Supports gold ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI,
rerouting AU_AIS

7.8 Silver Services


The service restoring time ranges from hundred milliseconds to a few seconds. The
silver level service is suitable for those data or internet services that have low
real-time requirement.
Silver services are also called rerouting services. Upon an LSP failure, periodical
rerouting is performed until the rerouting succeeds. If there are not enough resources,
service may be interrupted.
As shown in Figure 7-9, A-B-G-H-I is a silver service trail. If the fiber between B and G
is cut, the ASON triggers rerouting from A to create a new LSP that does not pass the
cut fiber. Hence, services are protected.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 136 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 7-9 A silver service

R1 R4
E
I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2

R3

: ASON NE

: User equipment

Table 7-7 lists the attributes of silver services.

Table 7-7 Attributes of silver services


Attribute Silver Services

Requirements for Sufficient non-protection resources are available between


creation the source node and the sink node.
Service restoration When the original LSP fails, rerouting is triggered to
create a new LSP to restore services.
Rerouting  Supports rerouting lockout.
 Supports rerouting priority.
 Supports three rerouting policies:
Use existing trails whenever possible
Do not use existing trails whenever possible
Best route
Revertive  Revertive services support reverting to the original route
automatically.
 Non-revertive services support reverting to the original
route manually.
Preset restoring trail Supports setting the preset restoring trail.
Shared mesh Supports setting the shared mesh restoration trial for
restoration trail revertive silver trials.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 137 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Attribute Silver Services

Service migration  Supports migration between permanent connections


and silver services.
 Supports migration between diamond services and
silver services.
 Supports migration between gold services and silver
services.
 Supports migration between silver services and copper
services.
Service optimization  Supports service optimization.
 If a revertive silver service reroutes, it cannot be
optimized before reverting to its original route.
Service association Supports service association.
ASON server trail Supports silver ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI,
rerouting AU_AIS

7.9 Copper Services


The copper services are seldom used. Generally, temporary services, such as the
abrupt services in holidays, are configured as copper services.
Copper services are also called non-protection services. If an LSP fails, services do
not reroute and are interrupted. Table 7-8 lists the attributes of copper services.

Table 7-8 Attributes of copper services


Attribute Silver Service

Requirements for Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the


creation source node and the sink node.
Service Does not support rerouting.
restoration
Service migration  Supports migration between permanent connections and
copper services.
 Supports migration between diamond services and copper
services.
 Supports migration between gold services and copper
services.
 Supports migration between silver services and copper
services.
Service Supports service optimization.
optimization

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 138 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Attribute Silver Service

Service Supports service association.


association
ASON server Supports ASON server trails.
trail

7.10 Iron Services


The iron services are also seldom used. Generally, temporary services are configured
as iron services. For example, when service volume soars, during holidays, the
services can be configured as iron services to fully use the bandwidth resources.
An iron service is also called a preemptable service. Iron services apply
non-protection resources or protection resources of the TE link to create LSPs.
When an LSP fails, services are interrupted and rerouting is not triggered.
 When the iron service uses the protection resources of the TE link, if the MS
switching occurs, the iron service is preempted and the service is interrupted.
After the MS is recovered, the iron service is restored. The interruption,
preemption and restoration of the iron service are all reported to the T2000.
 When the iron service uses the non-protection resources, if the network
resources are insufficient, the iron service may be preempted by the rerouted
silver service or diamond service. Thus, the service is interrupted.
Table 7-9 lists the attributes of iron service.

Table 7-9 Attributes of iron services


Attribute Iron Service

Requirements for Sufficient protection resources or non-protection resources are


creation available between the source node and the sink node.
Multiplex section To create iron services, the following resources can be used:
protection  Protection resources of 1:1 linear MSP
 Protection resources of two-fiber bidirectional MSP
 Protection resources of four-fiber bidirectional MSP
Service Does not support rerouting.
restoration
Service migration Supports migration between iron services and extra permanent
connections.
Service Supports service optimization.
optimization

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 139 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

7.11 Tunnels
Tunnels are mainly used to carry VC-12 or VC-3 services. Tunnels are also called as
ASON server trails.
When lower order services are to be created, first create a VC-4 tunnel. The
protection level for the tunnel can be gold, silver or copper. Then, use the
management system to complete the configuration of the lower order service. See
Figure 7-10.

Figure 7-10 Tunnel

VC4 tunnel VC12 service

R4
R1

R3

R2

: ASON NE
ASON domain
: User equipment

The configuration of a tunnel is different from that of the above-mentioned service


types. Its cross-connection from the tributary board to the line board can only be
configured manually. As shown in Figure 7-11, there is a tunnel between NE1 and
NE2 which can be a gold ASON server trail, silver ASON server trail or copper ASON
server trail. During service creation, the ASON automatically chooses the line boards
of NE1 and NE2 and the timeslots of the line boards.
After creating tunnels, you must manually create and delete the lower order
cross-connection from the tributary board to the line board. During rerouting or
optimization of the tunnels, however, the cross-connections at the source and sink
nodes automatically switch to the new ports.

In addition, the end-to-end tunnel and lower order service can be created.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 140 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 7-11 Lower cross-connection

VC12 ASON server trail VC12

NE1 VC4 NE2

Cross-connection
VC12

Tributary unit Line unit

Table 7-10 lists the attributes of tunnels.

Table 7-10 Attributes of tunnels


Attribute Gold Tunnel Silver Tunnel Copper Tunnel
Requirements Same as gold services Same as silver Same as copper
for creation services services
Service Same as gold services Same as silver Does not support
restoration services rerouting
Rerouting  Supports rerouting  Supports Does not support
lockout. rerouting lockout. rerouting
 Supports rerouting  Supports
priority. rerouting priority.
Revertive Not supported Not supported Not supported
Pre-configurat Not supported Supported Not supported
ion of
restoring
route
Service Not supported Supported Supported
association
Service  Supports migration between tunnel services and permanent
migration connections.
 Supports migration between silver tunnels and copper tunnels.
 Supports migration between gold tunnels and silver tunnels.
 Supports migration between gold tunnels and copper tunnels.
Service Supports service optimization..
optimization
Tunnel level VC-4

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 141 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

7.12 Service Association


The service association can be used to associate the same service accessed from
different points into the ASON network.
Service association involves associating two ASON services that have different routes.
During the rerouting or optimization of either service, the rerouting service avoids the
route of the associated service. Service association is mainly used for services
(dual-source) accessed from two points.
As shown in Figure 7-12, D-E-I and A-B-G-H are two associated LSPs. When the fiber
between B and G is cut, the rerouting of the A-B-G-H LSP avoids the D-E-I LSP.

Figure 7-12 Service association

R1 R4
E I

1+1protection D
F 1+1protection
C
A
B
H
G
R2

R3

: ASON NE

: User equipment

Table 7-11 lists the attributes of service association.

Table 7-11 Attributes of service association


Attribute Service Association

Service Supports optimization of associated services.


optimization
Rerouting When one service reroutes, it avoids the route of the associated
service.
Service type  Supports the association of two silver services.
 Supports association of two copper services.
 Supports the association of a silver service and a copper
service.
 Supports the association of two silver tunnels.
 Supports the association of two copper tunnels.
 Supports the association of a silver tunnel and a copper tunnel.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 142 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

7.13 Service Optimization


After the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory
routes and thus requires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating a
new LSP, switching the optimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original
LSP to change and optimize the service without disrupting the service. Of course, the
service route can be restricted during the service optimization.
LSP optimization has the following features.
 Only manual optimization is supported.
 The optimization does not change the protection level of the optimized service.
 During optimization, rerouting, downgrade/upgrade, or deleting operations are
not allowed.
 During creation, rerouting, downgrading/upgrading, starting or deleting
operations, optimization is not allowed.
 The following service types support optimization: diamond, gold, silver, copper
and tunnel services.

7.14 Service Migration


OptiX GCP supports the conversion between ASON services, and between ASON
services and traditional services. The service conversion is in-service conversion,
which would not interrupt the services.

Service Migration between ASON Trails and Permanent Connections


Currently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:
 Migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP connections
 Migration between gold services and permanent connections
 Migration between silver services and permanent connections
 Migration between copper services and permanent connections
 Migration between iron services and permanent connections
 Migration between tunnel services and server trail.

Service Migration between ASON Trails


Currently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:
 Migration between diamond services and silver services
 Migration between diamond services and copper services
 Migration between silver services and copper services
 Migration between gold services and silver services
 Migration between gold services and copper services
 Migration between gold tunnels and silver tunnels
 Migration between gold tunnels and copper tunnels
 Migration between silver tunnels and copper tunnels

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 143 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

7.15 Reverting Services to Original Routes


After many changes in an ASON network, service routes may differ from the original
routes. You can revert all service to the original routes.

The operation reverting network-wide services to original routes interrupts the


services. Be cautious to perform the operation.

Original Route
Generally, the route during ASON service creation is the original route of the ASON
service. If the original route recovers after rerouting of the ASON services, the
services can be adjusted to the original route manually or automatically. In addition,
the current route can be set to the original route after rerouting of the ASON services.
ASON services are classified into revertive services and non-revertive services. If the
original route recovers after rerouting, the revertive services can be manually or
automatically reverted to the original route. If the original route recovers after rerouting,
the non-revertive services can be only manually reverted to the original route. Before
the non-revertive services revert to the original route, the resources of the original
route may be used by other services.

Revertive Services
The ASON services supporting the service reverting are as follows:
 Diamond services
 Gold services
 Silver services
 Tunnels

Description on Service Reverting


For the detailed description of reverting, refer to the Table 7-12.

Table 7-12 Reverting service to original routes


Attribution Non-Revertive Service Revertive Service

Prerequisites The original route has no The original route has no


failures and has free timeslots. failures.
Reverting Manually reverting. Manually reverting or
mode automatically reverting.
Batch Supported. Not supported.
reverting

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 144 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Attribution Non-Revertive Service Revertive Service

Timeslots Only if the original timeslots in Services reverting to original


the original route are spare and routes. Services reverting to
is "Reverting to original original timeslots.
timeslots" set, the service can
revert to the original timeslots.
Modifying Supported. Supported.
original route
Reversion - Supported.
lock

7.16 Preset Restoring Trail


Customers may require that the services route to a specified trail in the case of trail
failure. To this end, the OptiX GCP provides the function of presetting the trail for
restoration. This function helps increase the controllability of service routing.
The OptiX GCP supports setting a preset restoring trail for a diamond/silver/gold
ASON trail. When the ASON trail reroutes, the service is restored to the preset
restoring trail.

7.17 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail


For a revertive silver service, a restoration trail can be reserved. In the case of
rerouting, the silver service reroutes to the reserved restoration trail. Such a
restoration trail is called a shared mesh restoration trail.
When a service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail reroutes, the service
uses the resources on this trail with priority. If all resources on the shared mesh
restoration trail are usable, these resources are used for service restoration. If only
partial resources on the shared mesh restoration trail are usable, these resources are
used with priority for computation of a restoration trail. The other resources may be
faulty or used by other services that share the trail.
As shown in Figure 7-13, the shared mesh restoration trail for two revertive silver
services share the TE link and timeslots between G and H. When the revertive silver
service 1 (A-B-C) reroutes, the service directly reroutes to the shared mesh
restoration trail 1 (A-G-H-C). When the revertive silver service 2 (D-E-F) reroutes, the
service directly reroutes to the shared mesh restoration trail 2 (D-G-H-F). If both silver
services reroute, only one of them can reroute to the shared mesh restoration trail, for
the two restoration trails share the TE link and timeslots between G and H.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 145 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 7-13 Shared mesh restoration trail


Revertive silver service 1
A B C

Share MESH
restoration trail 1

G H

Share MESH
restoration trail 2

D E
F
Revertive silver service 2

Features of the Shared Mesh Restoration Trail


The shared mesh restoration trail has the following features.
 Only the revertive silver service can be configured with the shared mesh
restoration trail.
 A shared mesh restoration trail cannot be set to concatenation services at
different levels.
 For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, the revertive
attribute cannot be changed.
 The resources on a shared mesh restoration trail can only be the unprotected
resources of TE links.
 For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, do not set
the preset restoration trail.

Differences Between Shared Mesh Restoration Trail and Preset Restoration


Trail
The shared mesh restoration trail and the preset restoration trail have the following
differences.
 For a preset restoration trail, only route information of the trail is recorded and no
resources are actually reserved. In this way, the resources for a preset restoration
trail may be used by other services. When the service reroutes, the preset
restoration trail cannot be used.
 For a shared mesh restoration trail, resources are actually reserved. The
reserved resources cannot be used by other services. In this way, services can
be restored with the best effort. In addition, to increase the resource utilization,
the shared mesh restoration trails for different services can share some
resources.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 146 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

7.18 Equilibrium of Network Traffic


The ASON network distributes the service traffic to different routes as possible.
The ASON calculates a best route according to the CSPF algorithm. If there are many
services between two nodes, there may be several services sharing a same route.
The traffic equilibrium function is used to avoid this situation. As shown in Figure 7-14,
there are many silver services between R2 and R4. To make the network more safe
and reliable, the ASON allocates them to different routes averagely as possible such
as A-D-E-I, A-B-C-F-I and A-B-G-H-I.

Figure 7-14 Traffic equilibrium

R1 R4
E
I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2

R3

: ASON NE

: User equipment

7.19 Shared Risk Link Group


In the ASON network, the SRLG needs to be set when a group of optical fibers are in
one cable.
The SRLG is the shared risk link group. Fibers in the same optical cable have the
same risks, that is, when the cable is cut, all fibers are cut. Hence, an ASON service
should not be rerouted to another link that has the same risk.
Hence, the SRLG needs to be correctly set for the links sharing the same risk in the
network so as to avoid that the LSP after rerouting of the ASON services and the
faulty link share the same risk and to shorten the service restoration time during
ASON service rerouting. You can change the SRLG attribute.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 147 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

7.20 ASON Trail Group


The ASON supports amalgamation of ASON and LCAS.

LCAS
LCAS is Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. With LCAS enabled, the bandwidth of
VCTRUNK can be adjusted dynamically without affecting services. As shown in
Figure 7-15, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s, with two transmitted over path 1
and two over path 2. If the VC4 in path 1 fails, the two VC4s in path 2 will transmit all
Ethernet service without affecting the service of VCTRUNK1. You can add VC4 on
either path if necessary.

Figure 7-15 LCAS (different path)

Path 1

VCTRUNK1

Router A Router B
NE1 NE2
Path 2

If these VC4s are transmitted over a path, adding/deleting VC4 will not affect the
service. As shown in Figure 7-16, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s. If the first VC4
fails, the Ethernet service remains unaffected.

Figure 7-16 LCAS (same path)

VCTRUNK1

NE1 NE2
Router A Router B

ASON Trail Group


An ASON trail group associates all member trails for the same LCAS service within
one LSP group. These member trails then can be added, deleted or modified. To
provide virtual services with the error tolerance ability, these member trails must be as
separate as possible.
Each ASON trail group is identified by an ID. The ASON NE allocates an ID to each
ASON trail group. The member trails within an ASON trail share the same source and
sink. The trails must also be as separated as possible.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 148 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

7.21 Protocol Encryption


You can encrypt the RSVP and OSPF in an ASON domain to improve the security of
the network.
An external entity may modify the OSPF-TE protocol packets of the network,
counterfeit a node of this network and transmit packets, or receive the packets
transmitted by nodes in the network and repeat the attack. To prevent these network
insecurities, the ASON provides the function to encrypt protocols. In an ASON domain,
the RSVP and OSPF-TE protocols are encrypted for authentication.
The RSVP authentication is configured for nodes and the OSPF-TE authentication for
interconnected interfaces (slots and optical interfaces).
The authentication can be non-authentication, plain text authentication or MD5
authentication.
The check succeeds only when the authentication modes and passwords of adjacent
nodes are the same.

7.22 Alarms of the Control Plane


To increase the network maintainability, the ASON network supports the reporting
alarms of the control plane.
Alarms on the control plane include node alarms, link alarms and service alarms.
Node alarms indicate whether the node ID and authentication code are correct, and
whether the node ID and authentication code are associated with neighbors. Link
alarms indicate the link availability, and whether the configuration of link timeslot and
MS is correct. Service alarms indicate whether the services are interrupted, whether
the service level is downgraded, and whether the service trail is changed.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 149 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

8 Protection

8.1 Equipment Level Protection


The equipment level protection includes TPS protection, 1+1 protection for boards
and 1+1 protection for power supplies.

8.1.1 TPS Protection for Tributary Boards


The equipment supports TPS protection of many service types.
Table 8-1 lists the supported TPS protection schemes and boards. Table 8-2 lists the
TPS protection parameters.

Table 8-1 TPS protection schemes and supported boards


Service Type Protection Scheme Supported Boards

E1/T1 One 1:N protection (N ≤ 2) N1PQM, N1PQ1, N2PQ1a


E1 Two 1:N protections (N ≤ 2) R1PD1, R2PD1
E3/T3/E4/STM-1 One 1:1 protection N1PD3, N1PL3, N2PD3,
N2PL3, N2PQ3, N1SPQ4,
N2SPQ4, N1SEP
DDN One 1:N protection (N ≤ 2) N1DX1
Ethernet One 1:1 protection N2EFS0, N4EFS0
a: The N1PQ1 and N2PQ1 boards do not support T1 services.

Table 8-2 TPS protection parameters


Parameter Description

Priority 1–X: X is equal to the number of working boards. Priority 1 is


the highest priority.
Switching type Forced switching, manual switching, lockout of switching

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 151 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Parameter Description

Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:


 The clock of the working board is lost.
 The working board is offline.
 The working board is cold reset.
 The hardware of the working board fails.
 A switching command is issued.
Switching time ≤ 50 ms
Revertive mode Revertive
WTR time 300s to 720s. The WTR time of 600s is recommended.

8.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect, Timing and SCC
Units
With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect, timing and SCC units, the equipment
can run in a safe manner.
For the OptiX OSN 1500, the cross-connect, timing and SCC units are integrated in
the CXL series boards. The CXL series boards adopt a 1+1 hot backup mechanism so
that the cross-connect and timing units are protected. Table 8-3 lists the 1+1 hot
backup parameters of the cross-connect, timing and SCC units.

Table 8-3 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect, timing and SCC units
Parameter Description
Slots for working and Slot 4 is for the working board and slot 5 is for the
protection boards protection board.
Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
 The working board is offline.
 The working board is cold reset.
 The board is warm reset and the switching protocol is
triggered.
 The hardware of the working board fails.
 A switching command is issued.
Revertive mode Non-revertive. After successful switching, the original
protection board becomes the working board, and the
original working board becomes the protection board.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 152 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

8.1.3 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards


The Ethernet boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS and DLAG protection schemes.
The N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and N3EGS4 boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS and DLAG
protection.
Table 8-4 lists the 1+1 protection parameters for Ethernet boards.

Table 8-4 1+1 protection parameters of Ethernet boards


Parameter BPS, PPS DLAG
Slots for working and Configurable according to the requirement.
protection boards
Switching condition Any of the following conditions Any of the following conditions triggers
triggers the switching: the switching:
 The port status of the working  The port status of the working board is
board is Link Down. Link Down.
 The clock of the working board  The clock of the working board is lost.
is lost.  The hardware of the working board
 The hardware of the working fails.
board fails.  The working board is off line.
 The working board is off line.
 A switching command is issued.
Switching time ≤ 350 ms In full duplex mode: ≤ 3 s
In auto-negotiation mode: ≤ 500 ms

When a protection group needs to perform the BPS or PPS protection switching, the
following conditions must be met.
 The equipment interconnected with the protection group must have the same
working mode as the protection group.
 The transmit end and the receive end should be connected directly through
optical fibers or network cables. No intermediate equipment should be present
between the two ends.
 The working mode should not be modified before the protection group is deleted.
Otherwise, the protection group becomes abnormal.

The equipment cannot detect the modification of the working mode at the receive end
of the protection group.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 153 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

8.1.4 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards


The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards of the OptiX OSN 1500 support board level 1+1
protection.
Table 8-5 lists the 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards.

Table 8-5 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards


Parameter Description
Slots for working and Configurable as required.
protection boards
Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
 A manual switching command is issued.
 The working board is offline.
 The working board is under a cold reset.
 The power supply of the working board fails.
 The clock of the working board fails.
 The hardware of the working board fails.
Revertive mode Non-revertive
Switching time ≤ 50 ms

8.1.5 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit


The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU.
The OptiX OSN 1500 can access two –48 V DC power supplies by using two R1PIU
or R1PIUA boards. These two power supplies provide a mutual backup for each other.
When either of them fails, the other power supply provides a backup to ensure normal
operation of the equipment.

8.1.6 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit


The WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX.
In the OptiX OSN 1500, the arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion unit N1LWX has
two types: One is single fed and single receiving, and the other is dual fed and
selective receiving.
A dual fed and selective receiving N1LWX board supports intra-board protection, and
one board of this type can realize optical channel protection. The single fed and single
receiving LWX boards support inter-board protection, that is, 1+1 inter-board hot
backup protection.
Table 8-6 lists the 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of the N1LWX board.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 154 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Table 8-6 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of N1LWX


Parameter Description

Slots for working and Configurable as required.


protection boards
Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
 The hardware of the working board fails.
 A switching command is issued.
Revertive mode Non-revertive
Switching time ≤ 50 ms

8.1.7 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply


The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this
protection, the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner.
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides reliable power backup for the +3.3 V power supply of
other boards, including the SCC and service boards by using the power backup unit
on the R1AUX or R2AUX board. When the power supply of a board fails, the backup
power supply immediately provides backup to ensure the normal operation of the
board.

8.1.8 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions


The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection
and overvoltage protection.

Power-Down Protection During Software Loading


The verification function is provided for applications and data. After software loading is
interrupted, the basic input/output system (BIOS) does not boot any applications or
data that are not successfully or completely loaded. Instead, the BIOS waits for the
loading to be resumed, until the software is successfully and completely loaded.

Overvoltage or Undervoltage Protection for Power Supply


The power board provides a lightning protection component to effectively avoid the
damage that may be caused by transient high voltages such as lightning.
When a board is in undervoltage, the board automatically resets its CPU so that the
software can re-initialize the chip.
The software provides mirroring protection for key registers whose abnormality can
affect services. In this case, when the value of such a register is changed due to
unstable voltages, the value can be restored to normal.
When a board is in undervoltage, the power system also automatically turns off the
power supply on the main loop so that the system is protected.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 155 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Board Temperature Detection


Temperature detection circuits are built in boards (for example, the cross-connect and
timing board) that generates a large amount of heat. When the board detects a high
temperature, an alarm is generated to prompt the maintenance personnel about
cleaning the fans.

8.2 Network Level Protection


The network level protection includes MSP protection, SNCP protection and DNI
protection.

8.2.1 Linear MSP


The linear MSP rings supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching,
1+1 dual-ended switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP rings.
The linear MSP is mainly used in a chain network. The OptiX OSN 1500 provides 1+1
and 1:N (N≤14) protection schemes, and supports a maximum of 12 linear MSPs. In
the 1:N protection scheme, extra services are supported to be transmitted on the
protection system. The switching time of linear MSP is less than 50 ms, as required in
ITU-T G.841.
For details, refer to the OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines.
Table 8-7 lists the linear MSP parameters.

Table 8-7 Linear MSP parameters


Protection Revertive Switching Switching Default Switching
Type Mode Protocol Time WTR Condition
Time

1+1 Non-revert Not ≤ 50 ms - Any of the


single-ended ive required following
switching conditions
triggers the
1+1 Revertive Not ≤ 50 ms 600s switching:
single-ended required
switching
 R_LOS
 R_LOF
1+1 Non-revert APS ≤ 50 ms -  MS_AIS
dual-ended ive protocol
switching  B2_EXC
 B2_SD
1+1 Revertive APS ≤ 50 ms 600s
(optional)
dual-ended protocol
switching  Forced
switching
1:N Revertive APS ≤ 50 ms 600s  Manual
dual-ended protocol switching
switching
 Exercise
switching

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 156 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

8.2.2 MSP Ring


The MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP
ring.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the hybrid application of two-fiber and four-fiber MSP
rings, with the switching time less than 50 ms, as required in ITU-T G.841.
Table 8-8 lists the maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 1500.
For details, refer to the OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines.

Table 8-8 Maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 1500
Protection Scheme Maximum Number of MSP Rings
Supported

STM-16 four-fiber MSP ring 1


STM-16 two-fiber MSP ring 2

Table 8-9 lists the MSP ring parameters.

Table 8-9 MSP ring parameters


Protection Revertive Switching Mode Switching Default Switching
Type Mode Time WTR Time Condition

Two-fiber Revertive  Forced switching ≤ 50 ms 600s Any of the


bidirectional  Manual switching following
MSP conditions triggers
 Exercise switching the switching:
Two-fiber Revertive  Forced switching ≤ 50 ms 600s  R_LOS
unidirectional  Manual switching  R_LOF
MSP
 Exercise switching  MS_AIS
 B2_EXC
Four-fiber Revertive  Forced switching - ≤ 50 ms 600s
bidirectional ring  B2_SD
MSP (Optional)
 Manual switching -
ring  Forced
switching
 Exercise switching -
ring  Manual
switching
 Forced switching -
span  Exercise
switching
 Manual switching -
span
 Exercise switching -
span

The MSP supported by the OptiX OSN 1500 has the following features.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 157 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Adjustable MS Bandwidth
The MS bandwidth refers to the number of VC-4s used by an MSP ring or chain.
In the case of the MSP, the OptiX OSN 1500 supports the bandwidth adjustment by
VC-4 without interrupting services. For an STM-16 bidirectional MSP ring, the MS
bandwidth ranges from one VC-4 to eight VC-4s. For an STM-16 four-fiber
bidirectional MSP ring, the MS bandwidth ranges from one VC-4 to 16 VC-4s.

Upgradeable MS Bandwidth
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports in-service upgrade of the MS bandwidth without
interrupting services. For example, an STM-4 MSP ring can be upgraded to an
STM-16 MSP ring without interrupting services.

Two Sets of K Bytes at the Multiplex Section


For STM-16 optical interfaces, the OptiX OSN 1500 is able to process two sets of K
bytes at the multiplex section. In this case, two MSP rings can be set up in one optical
interface.

MS Squelching
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the squelching of misconnected services at the VC-4
level.
In an MSP ring, each protection timeslot is shared by different spans or occupied by
extra traffic. When there is no extra traffic in the ring, and a multipoint failure causes a
node to be isolated from the ring, traffics that occupy the same timeslot may try to
preempt this timeslot. As a result, the misconnection of services occurs. When extra
traffic is transmitted in the protection path, the traffic on the working path may preempt
the protection timeslot that is being used by extra traffic, even if only one point fails in
the ring. As a result, the misconnection also occurs.
To prevent service misconnection, each OptiX OSN 1500 node sets up a detailed list
of connections. Each node knows the source and the sink of any AU-4. With the
automatic protection switching (APS) commands, each node can detect in advance
the possibility of misconnection. By inserting the AU-AIS alarm, each node then
discards these services that may be misconnected.

8.2.3 SNCP
The subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the subnetwork connection protection (SNCP), the
subnetwork connection multipath protection (SNCMP), and the subnetwork
connection tunnel protection (SNCTP), for subnetworks that meet the ITU-T G.841
requirements.

SNCP
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the end-to-end conversion between an unprotected
trail and an SNCP-protected trail. See Figure 8-1.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 158 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 8-1 End-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected


trail
The unprotected trail

NE2 NE6
NE1 NE3 NE5 NE7
NE4 NE8

Convert to an unprotected trail Convert to an SNCP-protected trail

The working trail

NE2 NE6
NE1 NE3 NE5 NE7
NE4 NE8

The protection trail

In the trail management window of the T2000, you can convert an exiting unprotected
trail to an SNCP-protected trail. In the opposite way, you can also convert an
SNCP-protected trail to an unprotected trail. In addition, the following trail-level
operations are supported:
 Manual switching to protection path
 Manual switching to working path
 Forced switching to protection path
 Forced switching to working path
 Wait-to-restore (WTR) time setting
 Revertive mode setting

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 159 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Table 8-10 lists the SNCP parameters.

Table 8-10 SNCP parameters


Protection Type Revertive Switching Default Switching
Mode Time WTR Time Conditions

SNCP Revertive ≤ 50 ms 600s Any of the following


conditions triggers
Non-revert ≤ 50 ms - the switching:
ive
 R_LOS
 R_LOF
 AU_LOP
 TU_LOP
 MS_AIS
 AU_AIS
 TU_AIS
 HP_UNEQ
(Optional)
 HP_TIM (Optional)
 B2_EXC
 B3_EXC
(Optional)
 B3_SD (Optional)
 BIP_EXC
 BIP_SD

SNCMP
The SNCMP is an N+1 (which means multiple protection paths protect a working path)
protection scheme. The SNCMP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCP is a 1+1
protection scheme.
The SNCMP provides multiple protection paths for a service. In this case, the service
protection is implemented by a mechanism of multiple fed at the source and selective
receiving at the sink. The SNCMP is supplementary to the SNCP.
Figure 8-2 illustrates the principle of multipath protection. The source broadcasts
services to multiple paths, and the sink determines which service to receive according
to the service priority and then the service quality. When services are correctly
received on both the working and protection paths, the sink selects the service from
the working path.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 160 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 8-2 Principle of multipath protection


A B

Working

Protection 1
Source Sink
Intermediate
Protection 2 subnetworks
Protection 3

In the SNCMP networking shown in Figure 8-3, two protection paths protect a working
path, and Protection 2 is a protection path that uses microwave as the transmission
media. Under normal conditions, NE3 receives the service from the working path.

Figure 8-3 SNCMP networking

NE 3

NE 4
NE 2

Microware
Protection 1 Working
NE 1 Radio

Protection 2

Microware
Radio

When the transmission between NE1 and NE2 becomes faulty, as shown in Figure
8-4, NE3 receives the service from the higher priority protection path Protection 1.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 161 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 8-4 SNCMP service route in the case of single point failure

NE 3

NE 4
NE 2

Microware
Protection 1 Working
NE 1 Radio

Protection 2

Microware
Radio

When the transmissions between NE1 and NE2, and between NE1 and NE4, both
become faulty, as shown in Figure 8-5, NE3 receives the service from the second
protection path Protection 2.

Figure 8-5 SNCMP service route in the case of multipoint failure

NE 3

NE 4
NE 2

Microware
Protection 1 Working
NE 1 Radio

Protection 2

Microware
Radio

SNCTP
The SNCTP provides protection paths at the VC-4 level. When the working path is
faulty, all its services can be switched to the protection path.
The SNCTP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCTP checks the status of only
the entire VC-4 path, and such a check is irrelevant to the levels of services in the path.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 162 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

When the working path is faulty, relevant higher order alarms are raised, and then all
services in the working path are switched to the protection path. If the fault is relevant
only to lower order services, lower order alarms are raised, and the switching does not
occur.

8.2.4 DNI
The DNI is a protection scheme used for the dual-node interconnection topology.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the DNI protection, which is compliant with the ITU-T
G.842.
The DNI network topology protection scheme effectively enhances the reliability of
inter-ring services. The DNI realizes the protection of services between two rings,
which are networked by the equipment from different vendors and adopt different
protection schemes. The DNI provides protection in the case of fiber failure and node
failure.
The DNI provides protection for services between the following rings:
 Two SNCP rings
 An SNCP ring and an MSP ring
 Two MSP rings
Figure 8-6 illustrates a DNI protection of two SNCP rings.

Figure 8-6 DNI protection of two SNCP rings


NE A

SNCP
Ring 1
NE C NE D

NE E NE F

SNCP
Ring 2

NE G
Selecting Point
Forward Working Routing
Reverse Working Routing

When any of the following faults occurs, the inter-ring services can be protected.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 163 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

 A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 1.


 A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 2.
 A fiber cut occurs on the two SNCP rings.
 NE C (primary node) or NE D (secondary node) is faulty.
 NE E (primary node) or NE F (secondary node) is faulty.
 NE C and NE E are faulty.
 NE D and NE F are faulty.
The primary node and the secondary node protect each other. When one node is
faulty, inter-ring services are not affected.

8.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection


When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-16, STM-4 or even
STM-1 optical channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher order
channels. These channels are then connected to other links at the channel layer to
form rings. In the case of the rings at the channel layer, protection schemes such as
the MSP, SNCP and non-protection can be set accordingly.
Figure 8-7 shows the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.

Figure 8-7 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection

STM-16
STM-16

STM-4 STM-4
SNCP MSP

8.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP


In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical interface can be configured into
multiple MSP groups, so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical
interface.
A prerequisite for this function is that the optical interface board must be able to
process multiple sets of independent K bytes. N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16 and
N1SF16 of the OptiX OSN 1500 support the configuration of shared optical paths. An
STM-16 optical interface supports a maximum of two sets of K bytes.
Figure 8-8 shows the networking of two-fiber optical-path-shared MSP supported by
the OptiX OSN 1500.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 164 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 8-8 Optical-path-shared MSP

STM-4 STM-4
STM-4 Optical-path-
shared MSP ring

STM-16

STM-4
Optical-path-
shared MSP ring
STM-4 STM-4

For example, two lower-rate west line units share one higher-rate east line unit, as
shown in Figure 8-9.

Figure 8-9 One higher-rate line shared by two lower-rate lines

MSP ring 1 STM-4

MSP ring 2
X STM-16
STM-16
STM-4

The OptiX OSN 1500 also supports the line units of the same rate to form a shared
protection in two directions, as shown in Figure 8-10. In this case, the west STM-16
line units can only add part of their VC-4s into the MSP ring protection group.

Figure 8-10 One line shared by two lines of the same rate

MSP ring 1 STM-16

MSP ring 2
X STM-16
STM-16
STM-16

8.2.7 RPR Protection


The RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering.
Figure 8-11 shows a bidirectional RPR that is of a reverse dual-ring structure. The
outer ring and the inner ring both transmit data packets and control packets. The
control packets on the inner ring carry the control information of the data packets on
the outer ring, and the control packets on the outer ring carry the control information of
the data packets on the inner ring.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 165 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

The RPR has the following advantage: On the RPR, every node assumes that the
packets added to the ring will finally reach their destination, regardless of which path
is used. A node can only perform three types of operations on the packets, that is,
insertion (adding a new packet onto the ring), forwarding (forwarding the packet), and
stripping (dropping the packet locally). Compared with a mesh network, an Ethernet
ring considerably decreases the communication traffic among nodes. This is because
a mesh network determines the forwarding port on the basis of every single packet.

Figure 8-11 Example of bidirectional RPR


Node 4

Outer ring

Inner ring
Node 3 Node 5
RPR

Node 1
Node 2

In the case of a fiber cut, the RPR provides the wrapping and steering functions for
packets.
The wrapping function connects the inner ring and the outer ring at the two nodes that
are adjacent to the fiber cut point. See Figure 8-12.

Figure 8-12 RPR wrapping protection


Node 4

Outer ring

Inner ring
Node 3 Node 5
RPR

Node 2 Node 1

Wapping

The steering function reversely transmits packets from the transmit node in the case
of a fiber cut. See Figure 8-13.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 166 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 8-13 RPR steering protection


Node 4

Outer ring

Inner ring
Node 3 Node 5
RPR

Node 2 Node 1

Steering

In both protection schemes, the packets can reach their destination in a reverse
direction, and the service failure time is less than 50 ms. During the protection
switching, the wrapping function is usually performed first. After the new topology and
the new service trail are created, the steering function is then performed. Such a
mechanism ensures that packets are not lost during the protection switching, and that
the protection switching time is decreased.

8.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection


The protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring.
Figure 8-14 shows the principle of VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection at the ATM layer. The
VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection scheme reserves the protection resources, and can be
applied on any physical topology. The reserved protection resources include routes
and bandwidths.

Figure 8-14 VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection


NE2

ATM service Working path ATM service

Protection path NE3


NE1

NE4

The OptiX OSN 1500 provides protection for virtual paths (VPs) and virtual channels
(VCs), and protects ATM services through a dual fed and selective receiving
mechanism. Two connections (VP/VC), which represent the working path and the
protection path, are set up at the source node NE1 and the sink node NE3. In normal
conditions, the receive end selects the service from the working path. When the
primary ring becomes faulty, the receive end detects the failure and triggers the
protection. In this way, the receive end selects the service from the protection path,
and thus the ATM service is protected.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 167 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

9 Clock

9.1 Clock Source


The OptiX OSN 1500 can trace different types of clock sources, which are as follows:
 External clock source
 Line clock source
 Tributary clock source
 Internal clock source
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports priority setting for clock sources. By default, the
internal clock source is of the lowest priority.

9.1.1 External Clock Source


The OptiX OSN 1500 support two external clock source inputs.
 Two 75-ohm external clock inputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
 Two 120-ohm external clock inputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)

9.1.2 Line Clock Source


The OptiX OSN 1500 can trace the line clock source.

9.1.3 Tributary Clock Source


The OptiX OSN 1500 can trace tributary clock sources.
The specific tracing relation is as follows.
 When tracing tributary clock sources, the NE can only trace the first port
(corresponding to the first physical port) or the second port (corresponding to the
ninth physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the PQ1, PQM and PD1.
 When tracing tributary clock sources, the NE can only trace the first port
(corresponding to the first physical port) or the second port (corresponding to the
fourth physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the PD3, PQ3.
 When tracing tributary clock sources, the NE can only trace the first port
(corresponding to the first physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the PL3,
DX1.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 169 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

 When tracing tributary clock sources, the NE can only trace the first port
(corresponding to any physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the SPQ4.

9.1.4 Internal Clock Source


When all the line, tributary and external clock sources in the priority list are not usable,
or when only the internal clock source is available in the priority list, the OptiX OSN
1500 uses the internal clock source as the system clock.

9.2 Clock Working Mode


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the clock working mode that complies with ITU-T
G.781. The modes are as follows:
 Locked mode
 Holdover mode
 Free-run mode

9.2.1 Locked Mode


In the locked mode, the OptiX OSN 1500 traces one clock source from the line clock
source, tributary clock source and the external clock source.

9.2.2 Holdover Mode


If all the clock sources are lost, the OptiX OSN 1500 uses the frequency information
stored before the clock source is lost. The frequency information complies with the
related phase standard defined in ITU-T G.813.

9.2.3 Free-Run Mode


The OptiX OSN 1500 works under the inherent frequency of its internal crystal
oscillator whose frequency stability is not lower than ±4.6 ppm.

9.3 Clock Outputs


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports three clock output schemes and two external clock
outputs.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the following clock outputs:
 Line clock outputs
 Tributary clock outputs
 External clock outputs

For tributary clock outputs, the OptiX OSN 1500 supports the tributary retiming function, which
helps improve the quality of the output tributary clock.

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports two external clock outputs:


 Two 75-ohm external clock outputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 170 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

 Two 120-ohm external clock outputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)

For external clock outputs, only two 75-ohm or two 120-ohm clocks can be used, but both the
clocks cannot be applied.

9.4 Clock Protection


The OptiX OSN 1500 provide the function for managing the SSM. The standard SSM
and extended SSM can be configured for clock protection switching.
The OptiX OSN 1500 provide the synchronization status message (SSM) function for
synchronous clocks. Either the standard SSM or the extended SSM can be configured
to realize the protection switching of clocks.

9.4.1 Clock Configuration with SSM Not Enabled


In the case of the OptiX OSN 1500, when the SSM is not enabled, it indicates that the
S1 byte is not used. In this case, the clock sources are selected or switched according
to the priority list. The clock source with the highest priority is the tracing source.
The priority list can be manually configured. Figure 9-1 shows the clock configuration
and the priority list when the SSM is not enabled.

Figure 9-1 Clock networking with SSM not enabled

BITS Node 1
Priority 1: BITS
Priority 2: Internal

Slot 8 Slot 11
Slot 11 Node 4
Node 2 Slot 8
Priority 1: Slot 11 Priority 1: Slot 8
Priority 2: Slot 8 Priority 2: Slot 11
Priority 3: Internal Slot 8 Priority 3: Internal
Slot 11
Slot 11 Slot 8

Node 3
Clock Priority 1: Slot 11
tracing Priority 2: Slot 8
Priority 3: Internal

9.4.2 Clock Configuration with Standard SSM Enabled


The standard SSM allows the OptiX OSN 1500 to choose the clock source of the
highest quality to prevent the generation of clock tracing ring.
Figure 9-2 shows the application of the standard SSM.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 171 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 9-2 Application of the standard SSM

BITS
Node 1
Fiber
break
Slot 8 Slot 11
Slot 11
Slot 8
Node 2 Node 4
Slot 8 Slot 11
Slot 11 Slot 8

Node 3
Node 3, N ode 2 automatically select
Clock the clock source of the highest quality.
tracing

9.4.3 Clock Configuration with Extended SSM Enabled


The standard SSM cannot prevent the clock lock ring in all cases. In this case, Huawei
provides the concept of the clock source ID.
The extended SSM uses the first four bits of the S1 byte as the clock source ID and
the latter four bits to indicate the quality of the clock source. The first four bits of the S1
byte is used to specify the unique ID of a clock source. These four bits are transmitted
along with the SSM. When receiving the S1 byte, a node checks if the clock source ID
is transmitted by itself. If the clock source ID is transmitted by itself, the node
considers the clock source as unavailable. In this way, this avoids the occurrence of
the clock lock ring.
Figure 9-3 shows the clock lock ring formed when the standard SSM is enabled.
Figure 9-4 shows the application of the clock source ID when the extended SSM is
enabled.

Figure 9-3 Clock lock ring formed when the standard SSM is enabled

BITS BITS
BITS
Node 1
failure Node 1

Node 2 Node 4
Node 2 Node 4
Clock mutual tracing
Node 3
caused by BITS failure Node 3
Clock
tracing

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 172 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 9-4 Application of clock source ID

BITS
BITS failure

Node 1
Node 2 Node 4

Node 3
Node 1 finds that the ID sent from Node 4 is
1, which is originated from itself. Node 1 will
not trace it to avoid the clock mutual tracing.
Clock tracing

A clock source ID can be manually set. In the case of the configuration of clock
protection for an SDH ring network, the clock ID is always manually set, to effectively
avoid the occurrence of clock lock ring. The clock ID occurs only at key nodes rather
than all the nodes in an SDH network. To set the clock source ID, do as follows:
 Allocate a clock ID for every external BITS.
 Allocate a clock ID for the internal clock source of every node that has an external
BITS.
 In case of signals that travel from a chain or a ring into another ring, allocate a
clock ID for the internal clock source of every junction node.
 In case of signals that travel from a chain or a ring into another ring, allocate a
clock ID for the line clock source (if any line source is involved at a junction node)
in the direction that the signal travels at every junction node.

9.5 Tributary Retiming


The retiming function is performed to combine service data and reference timing
signals from a digital synchronization network, and then to transmit the signals to the
receiver.

9.5.1 Retiming Principle


With the retiming technology, the 2048 kbit/s tributary in an SDH system is able to
transmit reference timing signals.
Figure 9-5 shows the retiming principle.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 173 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 9-5 Retiming principle diagram


SDH clock Extract clock( f0)
source SEC

Extract clock( f1)


PLL

f0
Desynchronization Retiming buffer
f1 Output
Input tributary signal
tributary signal

The retiming function is performed in the following process:


 The phase-lock loop (PLL) is used to extract clock f1 from the received tributary
signals.
 The desynchronization function is used to recover the tributary signal data in an
error-free manner, and then to store the data in the retiming buffer.
 The SDH equipment clock (SEC) f0, which is synchronous with the digital
synchronization network, is extracted and then added into the tributary signal
data.
In this way, the output tributary signals carry a good timing reference, which serves
the synchronous service equipment.

9.5.2 Application of the Retiming Function


PDH signals can pass through an SDH network with or without retiming.

PDH Signals Passing Through an SDH Network Without Retiming


Figure 9-6 shows how PDH signals pass through an SDH network without retiming.
On the synchronous service equipment i, the reference frequency f1 locks on f0 to
avoid a periodical slip. When PDH signals are adapted into the SDH transmission
network, pointer justifications cause phase jumps of output PDH signals, and thus
frequency f1 of the output PDH signals becomes asynchronous with f0. As a result, the
frequency of output signals cannot be used as a timing reference for equipment k,
such as a digital stored program control (SPC) switch.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 174 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 9-6 SDH transmission network without retiming


SDH transmission network

PRC

f1 f0 f0

S D
f1 f1 Synchronous
Synchronous D
S SDH SDH service
service
S MUX MUX D equipment k
equipment i
S D
f 1: PDH signal frequency The tributary signal frequency
f 0 : Frequency that traces an SDH PRC cannot be used as a synchronization
S: Synchronization clock for equipment k.
D: Desynchronization
R: Retiming
PRC: SDH primary reference clock

PDH Signals Passing Through an SDH Network with Retiming


Figure 9-7 shows how PDH signals pass through an SDH network with retiming. On
the synchronous service equipment i, the reference frequency f1 locks on f0 to avoid a
periodical slip. At the network output end, the retiming function provides a local timing
reference f0, and thus jitters and wanders caused by pointer justifications are
absorbed. Frequency f1 of the output PDH signals is still synchronous with f0, so
equipment k can extract tributary timing signals for the synchronization purpose.

Figure 9-7 SDH transmission network with retiming


Transmission network

PRC

f1 f0 f0

S D
Synchronous f1 Synchronous
service S SDH SDH D service
equipment S MUX MUX D equipment
i f0 k
S D R
f1: PDH signal frequency The tributary signal frequency can
f0: Frequency that traces an SDH PRC f0 be used as a synchronization clock
S: Synchronization for equipment k.
D: Desynchronization SEC
R: Retiming
PRC: SDH primary reference clock
SEC: SDH equipment clock

The transmission network in Figure 9-7 can be a single SDH network, or a


combination of several SDH and PDH networks.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 175 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

10 OAM

10.1 Operation and Maintenance


The cabinet, boards and functions of the OptiX OSN 1500 system are designed
according to the customer requirements to facilitate the operation and maintenance of
the equipment. Hence, the OptiX OSN 1500 system provides powerful equipment
maintenance capability for customers.

Alarm and Performance Management


 In the case of any emergency, the CXL board generates audible and visual
alarms to prompt the network administrators to take proper measures.
 The OptiX OSN 1500 provides three alarm input interfaces, one alarm output
interface to facilitate operation and maintenance of the equipment.
 Each board provides running and alarm indicators to help the network
administrators to locate and handle faults quickly.
 The connectivity of the network cable between NEs can be automatically
monitored. After detecting any faults, they automatically report the relevant
alarms.
 The working temperature of some boards can be queried.
 When the MSP or TPS switching occurs, the state of an alarm or of a
performance event is not changed in the working path. Thus, the service
administrator focuses on the service state only.

ALS Function
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function for the
SDH and Ethernet single-mode optical interfaces.
 When a fiber that connects two optical interfaces is cut, an R-LOS alarm is
generated at the optical interface of the local end. If the R_LOS alarm lasts for
500 ms, the laser of the transmit optical interface at the local end is automatically
shut down. By default, the laser pulse is generated at the 60-second interval and
lasts for 2s every time.
 After the fiber connection is restored, the optical interface at the opposite end
detects the laser pulse generated from the local end. The laser of the optical
interface at the opposite end then continuously launches laser beams. After
receiving the laser beams launched by the opposite end, the laser of the local

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 177 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

end then also continuously launches the laser beams. As a result, the two optical
interfaces can communicate with each other and the R-LOS alarm is cleared.

Optical Power Management


 The OptiX OSN 1500 supports in-service detection of the optical power of SDH
and Ethernet optical interfaces.
 The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the function to query the parameters of the SDH
optical module. The parameters that can be queried include the optical interface
type, fiber mode (single-mode or multi-mode), transmission distance,
transmission rate and wavelength.
 The optical interface board uses the pluggable optical module. Users can choose
single-mode or multi-mode optical modules according to the requirement. This
facilitates the maintenance.
 The optical power threshold of the boards can be queried.

Multiple Maintenance Methods


 The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the orderwire phone function for management
personnel at different node sites to communicate with each other.
 The T2000 can be used to dynamically monitor the equipment running status and
alarms of each NE in a network.
 The in-service upgrade of the board software and the in-service loading of NE
software are supported. The board software and the FPGA can be remotely
loaded with the error-proof loading and resumable loading functions.
 The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the remote maintenance function. When the
equipment becomes faulty, the maintenance personnel can use the public phone
network to remotely maintain the OptiX OSN 1500 system.
 The N1PQ1, N1PQM, N2PQ1, line boards and Q3CXL1/4/16 support the PRBS
test and the remote bit error test.
 The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the press-to-collect function for fault data. This
function reduces the data collection time before service restoration. By using this
function, the user is able to selectively collect fault data, and to manually interrupt
the collection according to the requirement.
 The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the board version replacement function. This
helps to replace the board of an old version with the board of a new version. After
the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new version board
are the same as the configuration and service status of the old version board.
 Ethernet boards provide the OAM function. This function is used to automatically
detect faults in Ethernet, and to help locate and isolate these faults.
 The power consumption of the equipment and boards can be queried and
controlled. After a board is inserted, it does not work if the total power
consumption of the boards exceeds the power consumption threshold of the
equipment.
 The port status can be queried.

10.2 Network Management


The OptiX OSN 1500 is uniformly managed by the OptiX iManager T2000
transmission network management system. The T2000 manages the OSN, SDH,

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 178 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Metro and DWDM equipment in the entire network. In compliance with ITU-T
Recommendations, the T2000 adopts a standard management information model and
the object-oriented management technology. The T2000 exchanges information with
the NE software through the communication module, to implement monitoring and
management over the network equipment.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the simple network management protocol (SNMP),
which solves the uniform NMS problem for the networking of equipment from different
vendors.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 179 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

11 Security Management

11.1 Authentication Management


Considering the security, only the legal user can log in to the NE after authentication.
 NE login management: You can successfully log in to the NE only by entering a
valid user name and a valid password.
 NE user switching: On a client, only one user is allowed to operate the NE each
time. For this reason, if multiple users intend to operate the same NE
simultaneously, they need to be switched to ensure that the data is unique.
 Forcibly making other users exit from the NE: To avoid errors caused by
simultaneous configuration by multiple users, or to prevent other users from
illegally logging in to the NE, one user can forcibly make other users who are at
lower level exit from the NE.
 NE login locking: After the locking function is enabled, a user whose level is lower
than that of the current user is not allowed to log in to the NE.
 NE setting locking: You can lock the settings of functional modules of the NE to
prevent other users from operating the locked modules.
 Query the online NE users.

11.2 Authorization Management


Proper authority assignment to different NE users can ensure the successful
operations performed by each user and the security of the NE system.
 NE user management:
− According to the operation authorities, NE users are divided into five levels,
which involve monitoring level, operation level, maintenance level, system
level, and debugging level in an ascending order.
− According to the T2000, NE users are classified into LCT NE users, EMS NE
users, CMD NE users, and general NE users.
− Create NE users, assign authorities, or specify a user flag.
− Modify the user name, change the password, modify the operation authority,
or change the user flag.
− Delete NE users.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 181 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

 NE user group management:


− According to the operation authority, by default, NE user groups are divided
into administrator group, super administrator group, operator group,
monitoring personnel group, and maintenance personnel group.
− Modify the group of a user.

11.3 Network Security Management


Safe data transmission between the T2000 and NEs is the prerequisite for the T2000
to effectively manage the NEs.
 The T2000 communicates with NEs through the security socket layer (SSL)
protocol. Therefore, the data is complete and safe.
 Set the ACL rule to filter the received IP packets, control the data traffic in the
network, and to avoid malicious attack. According to the system security level, the
ACL rule is divided into basic ACL and advanced ACL.
− For an NE that requires lower security level, you can set the basic ACL rule
only to check the source address of the IP packets only.
− For an NE that requires higher security level, you can set the advanced ACL
rule. In this case, the NE checks the source address, sink address, source
port, sink port, and protocol type of the received IP packets.
− If both the advanced and the basic ACL rules are available, the NE adopts the
advanced ACL rule to check the packets.
− Query the ACL rule.
− Modify the ACL rule.
− Delete the ACL rule.
 An NE can access the T2000 by using any of the following methods:
− Access over the Ethernet network. By default, an NE allows the T2000 to
access it over the Ethernet network.
− Access through the serial interface.
− Access through the OAM port.
− Access through the COM port. Owing to the security, after an NE is initialized
or downloads data, by default, the COM access function is disabled. The COM
access function can be enabled when necessary.
 Control the access to NEs by using LCT: If the T2000-LCT needs to be used to
manage NEs, you can enable the LCT access authority allowed by the NE on the
T2000.
 When the T2000 communicates with an NE, confidential data (such as user
name and password) is encrypted.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 182 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

11.4 System Security Management


Considering the security, the system provides some security policies, which must be
executed forcibly.
 Query or set the Warning Screen information of the NE.
 Query and set the Warning Screen switch of the NE to decide whether to report
an alarm after a user logs in to the NE.
 Query or set the earliest expiry time and the latest expiry time of the password.
 Query or set the maximum number of illegal login attempts.
 Query or set the maximum number of overdue password attempts.
 Query or set the password uniqueness.

11.5 Log Management


The OptiX OSN 1500 provides log management functions.

11.5.1 NE Security Log Management


The NE security logs record the operations performed by all the NE users and the
operation results. By querying these logs, the administrator can trace and review the
operations.
 Query the security logs of the NE.
 Set forwarding NE logs to the Syslog Server.

11.5.2 Syslog Management


The system log service (Syslog service) is used for the security management on an
NE. For unified control by maintenance engineers, all types of information are
transmitted to the log server in the format complying with the system log (Syslog)
protocol.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports:
 Enabling and disabling of Syslog protocol
 Setting of Syslog protocol transmit modes: UDP (by default) and TCP
 Adding and deletion of Syslog servers
 Coexisting of multiple Syslog servers and the sending of logs to multiple servers
at the same time
 Reporting of alarms upon the communication disconnection between the Syslog
server and the NE
Figure 11-1 shows how the Syslog protocol is transmitted in a network. To ensure the
security of system logs, make sure that at least two system log servers are available
in a network. Normally, IP protocol is used for the communication between the NE and
the system log servers. The communication between NEs can be realized through
several methods, for example, ECC mode or IP over DCC mode.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 183 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure 11-1 Schematic diagram of Syslog protocol transmitting


NE B

NMS NE A NE C
(client) (client)
ECC/ IP OVER DCC
TCP/IP

real time
Syslog Server B
security log

Syslog Server A
NE D

Normally, a system log server is a workstation or server that is dedicated to storing the system
logs of all NEs in a network.
A forwarding gateway NE receives the system logs of other NEs and forwards the logs to the
system log server. In Figure 11-1, NE A and NE C are forwarding gateway NEs.

When IP protocol is adopted on each NE for communication, every NE can directly


communicate with the two system log servers through the IP protocol. Hence,
configure the IP addresses and port numbers on the NE, and the system is able to
transmit the NE logs to the two Syslog servers through the auto addressing function of
IP protocol. No forwarding gateway NE is required.
When ECC mode is adopted on each NE for communication, the NE that does not
directly connect to the Syslog servers cannot communicate with the servers. The logs
of the NE must be transmitted to a gateway NE that directly communicates with the
Syslog servers through ECC. Then, the logs are forwarded to the Syslog servers by
the gateway NE. Hence, the forwarding gateway NE must be configured, for example,
configure NE A as the forwarding gateway NE for NE D.
For detailed Syslog configuration procedures, refer to the OptiX OSN 1500 Optical
Transmission System Configuration Guide.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 184 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

12 Technical Specifications

12.1 Interface Types


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports optical interfaces of different types.
Table 12-1 lists the optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500.

Table 12-1 Optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500


Interface Type Rate and Feature

SDH optical 155520kbit/s, 622080kbit/s, 2488320kbit/s, 2666057 kbit/s


interface
Ethernet interface 10/100Base-TX, 100Base-FX, 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX,
1000Base-ZX
ATM interface 34368 kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s, 622080 kbit/s
PDH/SDH electrical 1544 kbit/s, 2048 kbit/s, 34368 kbit/s, 44736 kbit/s, 139264
interface kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s
DDN electrical RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21, Framed E1
interface
Clock interface OptiX OSN 1500A:
Two 120-ohm clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
OptiX OSN 1500B:
Two 75-ohm clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
Two 120-ohm clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
Alarm interface Three alarm input interfaces, one alarm output interfaces,
alarm concatenated interfaces, four cabinet alarm indicator
interfaces
Auxiliary interface Administration interface, orderwire interface, data interface

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 185 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

12.2 Specifications of the Optical Interface


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports SDH optical interfaces, Ethernet optical interfaces and
ATM optical interfaces. This section lists the specifications of these optical interfaces.

12.2.1 SDH Optical Interface


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports SDH optical interfaces of different types.
Table 12-2 lists the specifications for the STM-1 optical interface of the OptiX OSN
1500.

Table 12-2 Specifications of the STM-1 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500
Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 155 520 kbit/s


Classification code I-1 Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Ve-1.2
Transmission 0 to 2 0 to 2 2 to 20 20 to 60 60 to 80 80 to
distance (km) 100
Operating 1260 to 1260 to 1261 to 1263 to 1480 to 1480 to
wavelength (nm) 1360 1360 1360 1360 1580 1580
Type of optical MLM MLM MLM MLM/SL SLM SLM
source M
Mean launched –15 to –19 to –15 to –5 to 0 –5 to 0 –3 to 0
power (dBm) –8 –14 –8
Receiver minimum –23 –31 –28 –34 –34 –34
sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum overload –8 –14 –8 –10 –10 –10
(dBm)
Minimum extinction 8.2 10 8.2 10 10 10
ratio (dB)

Table 12-3 lists the specifications for the STM-4 optical interface of the OptiX OSN
1500.

Table 12-3 Specifications of the STM-4 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500
Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 622 080 kbit/s


Classification code I-4 S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Ve-4.2
Transmission distance 0 to 2 2 to 20 20 to 50 50 to 80 80 to
(km) 100

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 186 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Item Specification

Operating wavelength 1261 to 1274 to 1280 to 1480 to 1480 to


(nm) 1360 1356 1335 1580 1580
Type of optical source MLM MLM SLM SLM SLM
Mean launched power –15 to –8 –15 to –3 to 2 –3 to 2 –3 to 2
(dBm) –8
Receiver minimum –23 –28 –28 –28 –34
sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum overload (dBm) –8 –8 –8 –8 –13
Minimum extinction ratio 8.2 8.2 10 10 10.5
(dB)

Table 12-4 lists the specifications for the STM-16 optical interface of the OptiX OSN
1500.

Table 12-4 Specifications of the STM-16 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500
Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 2 488 320 kbit/s


Classification I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 L-16.2(Je) V-16.2(Je U-16.2(Je)
code ) (BA) (BA+PA)
Transmission 0 to 2 2 to 25 25 to 50 50 to 80 80 to 105 105 to 145 to 200
distance (km) 145
Operating 1266 1260 to 1280 to 1500 to 1530 to 1530 to 1550.12
wavelength (nm) to 1360 1335 1580 1560 1565
1360
Type of optical MLM SLM SLM SLM SLM SLM SLM
source
Mean launched –10 to –5 to 0 –2 to 3 –2 to 3 5 to 7 Without Without
power (dBm) –3 BA: –2 to BA and
3 PA: –2 to
3
With BA: With BA:
13 to 15 15 to 18
Receiver –18 –18 –27 –28 –28 –28 Without
minimum BA and
sensitivity (dBm) PA: –28
With PA:
–32

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 187 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Item Specification

Minimum overload –3 0 –9 –9 –9 –9 Without


(dBm) BA and
PA: –9
With PA:
–10
Minimum 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
extinction ratio
(dB)
Maximum 12 - - 1200 to 2000 2800 3400
chromatic 1600
dispersion
(ps/nm)

Table 12-5 lists the specifications for the STM-16 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX
OSN 1500.

Table 12-5 Specifications of the STM-16 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500
Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 2 666 057 kbit/s


Classification code Ue-16.2c Ue-16.2d Ue-16.2f
Code contenta SF16+BA(14dB)+ SF16+BA(17dB)+ SF16+BA(17dB)+RA+PA
PA PA
Operating wavelength (nm) 1550.12 1550.12 1550.12
Mean launched power (dBm) Without BA and Without BA and Without BA, RA and PA:
PA: –5 to –1 PA: –5 to –1 –5 to –1
With BA: 13 to 15 With BA: 13 to 15 With BA: 15 to 18
Receiver minimum sensitivity Without BA and Without BA and Without BA, RA and PA:
(dBm) PA: –27.5 PA: –27.5 –27.5
With PA: –37 With PA: –37 With PA: –42
Minimum overload point (dBm) b –10 –10 –10
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) c 10 10 10
a: The number in the bracket indicates the corresponding parameter, for example, BA (14) indicates that the optical power
of the signal after it is amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC+BA+PA" indicates that the optical interface specifications
include FEC, BA and PA.
b: The parameter is that of the PA.
c: Parameters in the table are of the optical modules, excluding the amplifiers.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 188 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

The STM-16 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500 can output wavelengths that
comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The output wavelengths can be directly added to the
WDM system. Table 12-6 lists the wavelengths and frequencies of the STM-16 optical
interfaces.

Table 12-6 Wavelengths and frequencies of STM-16 optical interfaces


No. Frequency Wavelength No. Frequency Wavelength
(THz) (nm) (THz) (nm)

1 192.1 1560.61 21 194.1 1544.53


2 192.2 1559.79 22 194.2 1543.73
3 192.3 1558.98 23 194.3 1542.94
4 192.4 1558.17 24 194.4 1542.14
5 192.5 1557.36 25 194.5 1541.35
6 192.6 1556.56 26 194.6 1540.56
7 192.7 1555.75 27 194.7 1539.77
8 192.8 1554.94 28 194.8 1538.98
9 192.9 1554.13 29 194.9 1538.19
10 193.0 1553.33 30 195.0 1537.40
11 193.1 1552.52 31 195.1 1536.61
12 193.2 1551.72 32 195.2 1535.82
13 193.3 1550.92 33 195.3 1535.04
14 193.4 1550.12 34 195.4 1534.25
15 193.5 1549.32 35 195.5 1533.47
16 193.6 1548.51 36 195.6 1532.68
17 193.7 1547.72 37 195.7 1531.90
18 193.8 1546.92 38 195.8 1531.12
19 193.9 1546.12 39 195.9 1530.33
20 194.0 1545.32 40 196.0 1529.55

Table 12-7 lists the specifications of the colored optical interface of the OptiX OSN
1500.

Table 12-7 Specifications of the colored optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500
Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 2 488 320 kbit/s 2 666 057 kbit/s

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 189 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Item Specification

Dispersion limit (km) 170 640 640


Mean launched power (dBm) –2 to 3 –5 to –1 –5 to –1
Receiver minimum sensitivity –28 –28 –28
(dBm)
Minimum overload point –9 –9 –9
(dBm)
Maximum chromatic 3400 12800 12800
dispersion (ps/nm)
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 8.2 10 10
OSNR Without FEC: 21 With FEC: 16
Without FEC: 21

12.2.2 Ethernet Optical Interface


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports Ethernet optical interfaces of different types.
The specification of the Ethernet optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500 equipment
comply with IEEE 802.3 standards. Table 12-8 lists the specifications.

Table 12-8 Specifications of Ethernet optical interfaces


Interface Type of Transmittin Central Minimum Receiver Minimum
Type Optical g Optical Wavelength Overload Minimum Extinction
Source Power (nm) Point (dBm) Sensitivity Ratio (dB)
(dBm) (dBm)

1000Base-Z MLM –4 to 2 1480 to –3 –22 9


X (70 km) 1580
1000Base-Z MLM –2 to 5 1270 to –3 –23 9
X (40 km) 1355
1000Base-L MLM –9 to –3 1270 to –3 –19 9
X (10 km) 1355
1000Base-S MLM –9.5 to 0 770 to 860 0 –17 9
X (0.55 km)
100Base-FX MLM –15 to –8 1261 to –7 –28 10
(15 km) 1360
100Base-FX MLM –19 to –14 1270 to –14 –30 10
(2 km) 1380

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 190 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

12.2.3 ATM Optical Interface


The ATM optical interfaces include STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical interfaces.
Table 12-9 and Table 12-10 list the specifications of the ATM optical interfaces of the
OptiX OSN 1500.

Table 12-9 Performance of the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500
Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 155520 kbit/s


Classification code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Ve-1.2
Transmission distance 0 to 2 2 to 20 20 to 60 60 to 80 80 to 100
(km)
Operating wavelength 1260 to 1261 to 1263 to 1480 to 1480 to
(nm) 1360 1360 1360 1580 1580
Type of optical source MLM MLM MLM/SL SLM SLM
M
Mean launched power –19 to –15 to –8 –5 to 0 –5 to 0 –3 to 0
(dBm) –14
Receiver minimum –31 –28 –34 –34 –34
sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum overload –14 –8 –10 –10 –10
(dBm)
Minimum extinction 10 8.2 10 10 10
ratio (dB)

Table 12-10 Performance of the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500
Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 622080 kbit/s


Classification code S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Ve-4.2
Transmission 2 to 20 20 to 50 50 to 80 80 to 100
distance (km)
Operating wavelength 1274 to 1356 1280 to 1480 to 1480 to 1580
(nm) 1335 1580
Type of optical source MLM SLM SLM SLM
Mean launched -15 to -8 -3 to 2 -3 to 2 -3 to 2
power (dBm)
Receiver minimum –28 –28 –28 –34
sensitivity (dBm)

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 191 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Item Specification

Minimum overload –8 –8 –8 –13


(dBm)
Minimum extinction 8.2 10 10 10.5
ratio (dB)

12.2.4 Laser Safety Class


The safety class of the laser on each board is CLASS 1 or CLASS 1M.
Table 12-11 lists the safety classes of lasers used for the OptiX OSN 1500.

Table 12-11 Laser safety class


Laser Safety Class Board

CLASS 1 N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16, N1SL16A, N2SL16A, N3SL16A,


N1SF16, N1SL4, N1SL4A, N2SL4, R1SL4, N1SLQ4,
N1SLQ4A, N2SLQ4, N1SLD4, N1SLD4A, N2SLD4, R1SLD4,
N1SLT1, N1SLQ1A, N1SLQ1, N2SLQ1, R1SLQ1, N1SL1,
N1SL1A, N2SL1, R1SL1, N2SLO1, N1EGT2, N2EGS2,
N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N3EGS4, N2EGR2, N2EMR0, N1ADL4,
N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, N1IDQ1, N1MST4, N1OU08, N2OU08,
N1EFF8, Q2CXL1, Q3CXL1, Q2CXL4, Q3CXL4, Q2CXL16,
Q3CXL16, R1CXLL1, R1CXLD1, R1CXLQ1, R1CXLL4,
R1CXLD4, R1CXLQ4, R1CXLL16
CLASS 1M BA2, BPA, 61COA, N1COA, 62COA, N1FIB, ROP, N1MR2A,
N1MR2B, N1MR2C, N1LWX, TN11OBU1, TN11MR2,
TN11MR4, TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4

12.3 Specifications of Electrical Interfaces


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports PDH electrical interfaces, DDN electrical interfaces
and auxiliary interfaces.

12.3.1 PDH Electrical Interface


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports PDH electrical interfaces of several types.
Table 12-12 lists the specifications of the PDH electrical interfaces of the OptiX OSN
1500.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 192 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Table 12-12 Specifications of PDH electrical interfaces


Interface Type 1544 2048 34368 44736 139264 155520
kbit/s kbit/s kbit/s kbit/s kbit/s kbit/s

Code B8ZS, HDB3 HDB3 B3ZS CMI CMI


AMI
Signal bit rate ITU-T ITU-T G.703-compliant
at the output G.703-compliant
interface
Attenuation
tolerance at the
input interface
Frequency
deviation
tolerance at the
input interface
Anti-interferenc - - - -
e capability of
input interface

12.3.2 DDN Interface


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports DDN interfaces.
Table 12-13 lists the DDN interface types.

Table 12-13 DDN interface types


Interface Type Description Standard

Framed E1 Framed E1 Physical and electrical features comply with


interface type signal ITU-T G.703. The frame structure complies
with ITU-T G.704.
N x 64 kbit/s V.35 interface Complies with ITU-T V.35.
interface
V.24 interface Complies with ITU-T V.24.
X.21 interface Complies with ITU-T X.21.
RS-449 Complies with EIA RS-449 (RS-423A,
interface RS-422A).
RS-530 Complies with EIA RS-530.
interface
RS-530A Complies with EIA RS-530A.
interface

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 193 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

12.3.3 Auxiliary Interface


The OptiX OSN 1500 provides many auxiliary interfaces.

RS-232 Interfaces
Table 12-14 lists the specifications of the RS-232 electrical interfaces.
The RS-232 interfaces are S1, S2, S3 and S4 interfaces on the EOW or S1 and
S2 interfaces on the AMU.

Table 12-14 Specifications of the RS-232 interfaces


Item Specification

Bit rate 19.2 kbit/s to the maximum


Mode RS-232 Tx & Rx data only
Electrical level ±5 V to ±15 V

RS-422 Interfaces
Table 12-15 lists the specifications of the RS-422 electrical interfaces.
The RS-422 interfaces are S1, S2, S3 and S4 interfaces on the EOW or S1 and
S2 interfaces on the AMU.

Table 12-15 Specifications of the RS-422 interfaces


Item Specification

Bit rate 19.2 kbit/s to the maximum


Mode RS-422 Tx & Rx data only
Electrical level ±2.0 V

Orderwire Phone Interface


Table 12-16 lists the specifications of the orderwire phone interfaces.

Table 12-16 Specifications of the orderwire phone interface


Item Specification

Speech channel interface


Impedance 600 ohms
Bandwidth 300 Hz to 3400 Hz
Operating current 18 mA
Input gain –4/0/0 dB

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 194 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Item Specification

Output gain 0/–7/0 dB


Signaling DTMF compliant with ITU-T Q.23

12.4 Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance


The clock interfaces and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 1500
complies with related ITU-T Recommendations.

12.4.1 Clock Interface Type


The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the external clock input interfaces and clock output
interfaces.
Table 12-17 lists the clock features of the OptiX OSN 1500.

Table 12-17 Clock features


Clock Type Feature

External OptiX OSN 1500A:


synchronization Two 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock
source inputs
OptiX OSN 1500B:
Two 75-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock
inputs
Two 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock
inputs
Synchronizatio OptiX OSN 1500A:
n output Two 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock
outputs
OptiX OSN 1500B:
Two 75-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock
outputs
Two 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock
outputs

12.4.2 Timing and Synchronization Performance


The timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 1500 complies with
ITU-T G.813.
Table 12-18 lists the timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 1500
equipment.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 195 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Table 12-18 Timing and synchronization performance


Output Jitter Output Frequency of Internal Long-Term Phase Variation
Oscillator in the Free-Run Mode in the Locked Mode

G.813 G.813 compliant G.813 compliant


compliant

12.5 Transmission Performance


The transmission performance of the OptiX OSN 1500 complies with ITU-T standards.
Table 12-19 lists the performance of the output jitter and bit error in an SDH/PDH
network.

Table 12-19 Transmission performance


Jitter at STM-N Jitter at PDH Interface Bit Error
Interface

G.813/G.825 compliant G.823/G.783 compliant G.826 compliant

12.6 Timeslot Numbering


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports two numbering schemes for TU-12.
Table 12-20 and Table 12-21 list the details.

Table 12-20 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme I)


TUG2 (7-1) TUG2 TUG2 TUG (7-4) TUG (7-5) TUG (7-6) TUG
(7-2) (7-3) (7-7)

TU-3 (3-1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
TU-3 (3-2) 22 23 24 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4
5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
TU-3 (3-3) 43 44 45 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6
6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 196 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Table 12-21 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme II)


TUG2 (7-1) TUG2 TUG2 TUG2 TUG2 TUG2 TUG2
(7-2) (7-3) (7-4) (7-5) (7-6) (7-7)

TU-3 (3-1) 1 22 43 4 25 46 7 2 4 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 4 6
8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
TU-3 (3-2) 2 23 44 5 26 47 8 2 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 2 4 6
9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
TU-3 (3-3) 3 24 45 6 27 48 9 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 6 2 4 6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3

12.7 Power Supply Specification


The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the input of –48 V or –60 V DC power supply.
Table 12-22 lists the specifications of the power supply.

Table 12-22 Power supply specifications


Item Specification

Power supply mode DC power supply


Nominal voltage –48 V or –60 V
Voltage range –38.4 V to –57.6 V or –48 V to –72 V
Maximum power OptiX OSN 1500A: 200 W
consumption OptiX OSN 1500B: 280 W
Maximum current OptiX OSN 1500A: 4.5 A
OptiX OSN 1500B: 6 A

12.8 Power Consumption and Weight of Boards


Different boards have different power consumption and weight.
Table 12-23 lists the power consumption and weight of the boards.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 197 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Table 12-23 Power consumption and weight of the boards


Board Power Consumption Weight Board Power Consumption Weight
(W) (kg) (W) (kg)

SDH Processing Boards


N1SLT1 15 1.2 N1SLQ4 16 1.0
N1SLQ1 15 1.0 N1SLQ4A 17 1.0
N1SLQ1A 17 1.0 N2SLQ4 16 1.0
N2SLQ1 15 1.0 N1SLD4 15 1.0
R1SLQ1 12 0.54 N1SLD4A 17 1.0
N1SL1, 14 1.0 N2SLD4 15 1.0
N2SL1
N1SL1A 17 1.0 R1SLD4 11 0.5
R1SL1 10 0.5 N1SL4, 15 1.0
N2SL4
N1SF16 26 1.1 N1SL4A 17 1.0
N1SL16, 20 1.1 R1SL4 10 0.5
N2SL16
N3SL16 22 1.1 N1SL16A, 20 1.1
N2SL16A
N1SEP1 17 1.0 N3SL16A 17 0.9
PDH Processing Boards
N1PQM 22 1.0 N2PQ3 13 0.9
N1SPQ4 24 0.9 N1PL3 15 1.0
N2SPQ4 24 0.9 N1PL3A 15 1.1
N1PQ1 19 1.0 N2PL3 12 0.9
N2PQ1 13 1.0 N1PD3 19 1.1

R1PL1A、 7 0.5 N2PD3 12 0.9


R1PL1B
R1PD1 15 0.5 N2PD3 12 0.9
R2PD1 10 0.6 N1DXA 10 0.8
N1DX1 15 1.0 - - -

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 198 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Board Power Consumption Weight Board Power Consumption Weight


(W) (kg) (W) (kg)

Interface Boards and Protection Switching Boards


N1EU08 11 0.4 N1ETS8 0 (before the TPS 0.4
switching); 3 (after
the TPS switching)
N1MU04 2 0.4 N1TSB4 3 0.3
N1OU08 6 0.4 N1TSB8 0 (before the TPS 0.3
switching); 5 (after
the TPS switching)
N2OU08 6 0.4 N1C34S 0 (before the TPS 0.3
switching); 2 (after
the TPS switching)
N1EU04 6 0.4 N1D12S 0 (before the TPS 0.4
switching); 9 (after
the TPS switching)
R1L75S 5 0.3 N1D34S 0 (before the TPS 0.4
switching); 2 (after
the TPS switching)
R1L12S 3 0.2 N1D75S 0 (before the TPS 0.4
switching); 6 (after
the TPS switching)
N1DM12 0 (before the TPS 0.5 N1D12B 0 0.3
switching); 8 (after the
TPS switching)
N1ETF8 2 0.4 - - -
Data Processing Boards
N1EGS4 70 1.1 N1EFF8 6 0.4
N3EGS4 70 1.1 N1EFS0 35 1.0
N2EGR2 40 1.1 N2EFS0 35 1.0
N2EGS2 43 1.0 N4EFS0 35 1.0
N1EGT2 29 0.9 N1EFS4 30 1.0
N2EMR0 50 1.2 N2EFS4 30 1.0
N1EMS4 65 (without an 1.1 N1ADQ1 41 1.0
interface board); 75
(with an interface
board)
R1EFT4 14 0.5 N1ADL4 41 0.9
N1EFT8 26 1.0 N1IDL4 41 1.0

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 199 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Board Power Consumption Weight Board Power Consumption Weight


(W) (kg) (W) (kg)

N1EFT8A 26 1.0 N1IDQ1 41 1.0


N1MST4 26 0.9 - - -
Cross-connect and System Control Boards
Q2CXL16, 40 1.1 R1CXLQ4, 50 1.0
Q2CXL4, R1CXLQ1,
Q2CXL1 R1CXLD4,
R1CXLD1,
R1CXLL16,
R1CXLL4,
R1CXLL1
Q3CXL16, 46 1.2 - - -
Q3CXL4,
Q3CXL1
Other Boards
N1LWX 30 1.1 TN11CMR2 0.2 0.8
N1MR2B 0 1.0 TN11CMR4 0.2 0.9
N1MR2C 0 1.0 N1FIB 0 0.4
TN11MR2 0.2 0.9 TN11OBU1 16 1.3
TN11MR4 0.2 0.9 R1FAN 20 1.0
N1BA2 20 1.0 AUX 19 1.0
N1BPA 20 1.0 R1AMU 8 0.5
N2BPA 11 1.2 EOW 10 0.4
PIU, PIUA 2 1.3 - - -

12.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility


The OptiX OSN 1500 is designed in accordance with the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300
127 standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) related tests.
Table 12-24 lists the passed EMC-related test specifications.

Table 12-24 EMC test results


Item Standard

Radiated emission CISPR22 Class


AEN55022 Class A

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 200 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Item Standard

Conducted emission for DC port CISPR22 Class A


EN55022 Class A
Conducted emission for signal ports CISPR22 Class A
EN55022 Class A
Immunity to Radiated ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
Electromagnetic Field IEC 61000-4-3(80 MHz–2700 MHz: 10
V/m)
Immunity to electrostatic discharge ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-2 (Air Discharge:±8 kV;
Contact Discharge:±6 kV)
Immunity to electrical fast transient ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
bursts for DC ports IEC 61000-4-4(±1 kV)
Immunity to electrical fast transient ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2
bursts for signal ports IEC 61000-4-4(±1 kV)
Immunity to surges for DC ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-5(Line to Line: ±1 kV, Line to
Ground: ±2 kV)
Immunity to surges for signal ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-5(±1 kV)
Immunity to continuous conducted ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
interference for DC ports IEC 61000-4-6(10 V)
Immunity to continuous conducted ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
interference for signal ports IEC 61000-4-6(10 V)
Immunity To Continuous Voltage dips ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
and Short Interruption and Voltage IEC 61000-4-29
Variation for DC Power Port

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 201 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

12.10 Safety Certification


The OptiX OSN 1500 has received several safety certifications.
Table 12-25 lists the safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 1500 has received.

Table 12-25 Safety certifications


Item Standard
Electromagnetic compatibility CISPR22 Class A
(EMC) CISPR24
EN55022 Class A
EN50024
ETSI EN 300 386 Class A
ETSI ES 201 468
CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Class A
ICES 003 Class A
AS/NZS CISPR22 Class A
GB9254 Class A
VCCI Class A
Safety IEC 60950-1
IEC/EN41003
EN 60950-1
UL 60950-1
CSA C22.2 No 60950-1
AS/NZS 60950-1
BS EN 60950-1
IS 13252
GB4943
Laser safety FDA rules
21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11
IEC60825-1
IEC60825-2
EN60825-1
EN60825-2
GB7247
Health ICNIRP Guideline
1999-519-EC
EN 50385
OET Bulletin 65
IEEE Std C95.1
Environment protection RoHS

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 202 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

12.11 Environmental Specification


The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a proper environment for normal operation.
The OptiX OSN 1500 can operate normally for a long term in the environment defined
in Table 12-26.

Table 12-26 Environment specifications for long-term operation


Item Range

Altitude ≤ 4000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature 0℃ to 45℃
Relative humidity 10% to 90%
Anti-seismic performance ETS300-019-2-3-AMD

12.12 Environment Requirement


The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a different environment for storage, transportation and
operation. This section lists the environment requirements.
The following international standards are taken as the reference for specifying the
environment requirements.
 ETS (European Telecommunication Standards) 300 019-1-3: Class 3.2 Partly
temperature-controlled location
 NEBS GR-63-CORE: Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS)
Requirements: Physical Protection

12.12.1 Environment for Storage


The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a proper climate for storage.

Climate
Table 12-27 lists the climate requirements for storage.

Table 12-27 Climate requirements for storage


Item Range

Altitude ≤ 4000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature –40℃ to +70℃
Temperature change rate ≤ 1 ℃/min
Relative humidity 5% to 100%

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 203 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Item Range

Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/s2


Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s2
Air flowing speed ≤ 30 m/s

Waterproof Requirement
The requirement for storing the equipment on the customer site is that generally, the
equipment must be stored indoors.
There should be no water on the floor or water entering the equipment carton. The
equipment should be placed away from places where there are possibilities of water
leakage, such as near the auto fire-fighting facilities and heating facilities.
If the equipment is stored outdoors, ensure that following conditions are met.
 The carton must be intact.
 Take rainproof measures to prevent water from entering the carton.
 There should be no water on the ground where the carton is placed.
 The carton must be free from direct exposure to sunlight.

Biological Environment
 Avoid the growth of microbes, such as eumycete and mycete.
 Take anti-rodent measures.

Air Cleanness
 The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or
corrosive dust.
 The density of the mechanical active substances complies with the requirements
defined by Table 12-28.

Table 12-28 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during storage
Mechanical Active Substance Content

Suspending dust ≤ 5.00 mg/m3


Precipitable dust ≤ 20.0 mg/m2·h
Gravel ≤ 300 mg/m3

 The density of the chemical active substances complies with the requirements
defined by Table 12-29.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 204 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Table 12-29 Density requirements for chemical active substances during storage
Chemical Active Substance Content

SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3


H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
NO2 ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3

Mechanical Stress
Table 12-30 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during storage.

Table 12-30 Requirements for mechanical stress during storage


Item Sub-Item Range
Random Acceleration - 0.02 m2/s3 -
vibration spectral density
Frequency range 5 Hz to 20 Hz 20 Hz to 50 Hz 50 Hz to 100 Hz
dB/oct +12 - -12

12.12.2 Environment for Transportation


The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a proper climate for transportation.

Climate
Table 12-31 lists the climate requirements for transportation.

Table 12-31 Climate requirements for transportation


Item Range

Altitude ≤ 4000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature –40℃ to +70℃
Temperature change rate ≤ 1℃/min

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 205 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Item Range

Relative humidity 5% to 100%


Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/s2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s2
Air flowing speed ≤ 30 m/s

Waterproof Requirement
Ensure that the following conditions are met when transporting the equipment:
 The carton must be intact.
 Take rainproof measures to prevent water from entering the carton.
 There should be no water in the transportation tool.

Biological Environment
 Avoid the growth of microbes, such as eumycete and mycete.
 Take anti-rodent measures.

Air Cleanness
 The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or
corrosive dust.
 The density of the mechanical active substances complies with the requirements
defined by Table 12-32.

Table 12-32 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during


transportation
Mechanical Active Substance Content

Suspending dust No requirement


Precipitable dust ≤ 3.0 mg/m2·h
Gravel ≤ 100 mg/m3

 The density of the chemical active substances complies with the requirements
defined by Table 12-33.

Table 12-33 Density requirements for chemical active substances during transportation
Chemical Active Substance Content

SO2 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3


H2S ≤ 0.50 mg/m3

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 206 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Chemical Active Substance Content

NO2 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3


NH3 ≤ 3.00 mg/m3
Cl2 -
HCl ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.03 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

Mechanical Stress
Table 12-34 lists the requirements for transporting the OptiX OSN 1500 equipment.

Table 12-34 Requirements for mechanical stress during transportation


Item Sub-Item Range

Random vibration Acceleration spectral 1 m2/s3 –3 dBA


density
Frequency range 5 Hz to 20 Hz 20 Hz to 200 Hz
Impact Impact response spectrum 100 m/s2, 11 ms, 100 times on
I (sample weight > 50 kg) each surface
Impact response spectrum 180 m/s2, 6 ms, 100 times on
II (sample weight ≤ 50 kg) each surface
Fall-off Weight (kg) Height (m)
<10 1.0
<15 1.0
<20 0.8
<30 0.6
<40 0.5
<50 0.4
<100 0.3
>100 0.1
NOTE
Impact response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by the
equipment that is spurred by a specified impact. Static load is the pressure from the top, which
the equipment with the package can endure when the equipment is placed in a specific manner.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 207 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

12.12.3 Environment for Operation


The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a proper climate for operation.

Climate
Table 12-35 and Table 12-36 list the climate requirements for operation of the OptiX
OSN 1500.

Table 12-35 Requirements for temperature and humidity


Temperature Relative Humidity

Long-term Short-term operation Long-term Short-term


operation operation operation
0℃ to 45℃ –5℃ to 55℃ 10% to 90% 5% to 95%
NOTE
The temperature and humidity values are tested in a place that is 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4
m in front of the equipment. Short-term operation means that the consecutive working time of
the equipment does not exceed 96 hours, and the accumulated working time every year does
not exceed 15 days.

Table 12-36 Other climatic requirements


Item Range

Altitude ≤ 4000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature change rate ≤ 30℃/h
Solar radiation ≤ 700 W/s2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s2
Air flowing speed ≤ 5 m/s

Biological Environment
 Avoid the growth of microbes, such as eumycete and mycete.
 Take anti-rodent measures.

Air Cleanness
 The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or
corrosive dust.
 The density of the mechanical active substances complies with the requirements
defined by Table 12-37.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 208 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Table 12-37 Requirements for the density of the mechanical active substance
Mechanical Active Content
Substance

Dust particle ≤ 3 x 105 particles/m3


Suspending dust ≤ 0.2 mg/m3
Precipitable dust ≤ 1.5 mg/m2·h
Gravel ≤ 20 mg/m3

 The density of the chemical active substances complies with the requirements
defined by Table 12-38.

Table 12-38 Density requirements for chemical active substances during operation
Chemical Active Substance Content

SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3


H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3
NOX ≤ 0.50 mg/m3

Mechanical Stress
Table 12-39 lists the requirements of mechanical stress for operation.

Table 12-39 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation


Item Sub-Item Range

Sinusoidal Velocity ≤ 5 mm/s -


vibration
Acceleration - ≤ 2 m/s2
Frequency range 5 Hz to 62 Hz 62 Hz to 200 Hz
Impact Impact response Half-sin wave, 30 m/s2, 11 ms, three times
spectrum II on each surface
Static load 0 kPa

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 209 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Item Sub-Item Range

NOTE
Impact response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by an
equipment that is spurred by a specified impact. Static load is the pressure from the top, which
the equipment with package can endure when the equipment is placed in a specific manner.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 210 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

A Compliant Standards

This chapter lists the standards that OptiX OSN 1500 complies with.

A.1 ITU-T Recommendations


Table A-1 ITU-T recommendations
Recommendation Description

G.652 Characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber cable


G.655 Characteristics of a non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode optical fiber and
cable
G.661 Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters of optical fiber
amplifiers
G.662 Generic characteristics of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub-systems
G.663 Application related aspects of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub-systems
G.671 Transmission characteristics of optical components and subsystems
G.691 Optical interfaces for single channel STM-64 and other SDH systems with optical
amplifiers
G.692 Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical amplifiers
G.694.1 Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency grid
G.694.2 Spectral grids for WDM applications: CWDM wavelength grid
G.702 Digital hierarchy bit rates
G.703 Physical/electrical characteristic of hierarchical digital interfaces
G.704 Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and 44736kbit/s
hierarchical levels
G.7041 Generic framing procedure (GFP)
G.7042 Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)
G.707 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 211 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Recommendation Description

G.709 Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN)


G.773 Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission systems
G.774 1-5 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management information model for the
network element view
G.775 Loss of signal (LOS) and alarm indication signal (AIS) defect detection and
clearance criteria
G.783 Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) equipment functional
blocks
G.784 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management
G.803 Architectures of transport networks based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
(SDH)
G.811 Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks
G.812 Timing requirements of slave clocks suitable for use as node clocks in
synchronization networks
G.813 Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC)
G.823 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the
2048kbit/s hierarchy.
G.824 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the
1544kbit/s hierarchy.
G.825 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH).
G.826 Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit rate
digital paths at or above the primary rate.
G.831 Management capabilities of transport networks based on the Synchronous
Digital Hierarchy (SDH).
G.841 Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures
G.842 Cooperation of the SDH network protection structures
G.957 Optical interfaces of equipments and systems relating to the synchronous digital
hierarchy
G.958 Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical
fiber cables
I.121 Broadband aspects of ISDN
I.150 B-ISDN asynchronous transfer mode functional characteristics
I.311 B-ISDN general network aspects
I.321 B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions
I.361 B-ISDN ATM layer specification

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 212 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Recommendation Description

I.630 ATM protection switching


M.3010 Principles for a telecommunication management network
Q.811 Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface
Q.812 Upper layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface
V.24 List of definitions for interchange circuits between data terminal equipment
(DTE) and data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE)
V.35 Data transmission at 48 kilobits per second using 60-108 kHz group band
circuits
V.28 Electrical characteristics for unbalanced double-current interchange circuits
X.21 Use on public data networks of Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) which is
designed for interfacing to synchronous V-Series modems
X.86 Ethernet over LAPS

A.2 IEEE Standards


Table A-2 IEEE standards
Standard Description

IEEE 802.17 Resilient packet ring access method and physical layer specifications
IEEE 802.1ad Virtual bridged local area networks — Amendment 4: Provider bridges
IEEE 802.1ag Connectivity fault management
IEEE 802.1d Media access control (MAC) bridges
IEEE 802.1q Virtual bridged local area networks
IEEE 802.3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access
method and physical layer specification
IEEE 802.3ad Aggregation of multiple link segments
IEEE 802.3ah Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access
method and physical layer specifications
IEEE 802.3u Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, medium attachment
units, and repeater for 100 Mb/s operation, type 100Base-T
IEEE 802.3x Standards for local and metropolitan area networks: specification for 802.3 full
duplex operation
IEEE 802.3z Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, repeater and
management parameters for 1000 Mb/s operation

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 213 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

A.3 IETF Standards


Table A-3 IETF standards
Standard Description

RFC 2615 (1999) PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) over SONET/SDH


RFC 1662 (1994) PPP in HDLC-like Framing
RFC 1661 (1994) The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)
RFC 1990 The PPP Multilink Protocol (MP)
RFC 2514 Definitions of textual conventions and
OBJECT-IDENTITIES for ATM management
RFC 3031 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Architecture
RFC 3032 MPLS Label Stack Encoding

A.4 ANSI Standards


Table A-4 ANSI related standards
Standard Description

ANSI X3.296 SBCON (ESCON): FICON


ANSI X3.230 Fiber channel - physical and signaling interface (FC-PH)

A.5 Environment Related Standards


Table A-5 Environment related standards
Standard Description

IEC 60068-2 Basic environmental testing procedures


IEC 60068-3-3 Environmental testing - Part 3: Background information -
Subpart 3: Guidance. Seismic test methods for equipments
IEC 60721-2-6 Environmental conditions appearing in nature - Earthquake
vibration
IEC 60721-3-1 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3:
Classification of groups of environmental parameters and
their severities - Section 1: Storage

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 214 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Standard Description

IEC 60721-3-3 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3:


Classification of groups of environmental parameters and
their severities - Section 3: Stationary use at
weatherprotected locations
ETS 300 019-1-1 Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage
locations
ETS 300 019-1-3: Partly temperature-controlled location
NEBS Network equipment-building system (NEBS) requirements:
GR-63-CORE Physical protection

A.6 EMC Standards


Table A-6 EMC related standards
Standard Description

IEC 61000-4-2 Electromagnetic compatibility-Part4-2: Testing and


EN 61000-4-2 measurement techniques-Electrostatic discharge immunity
test
IEC 61000-4-3 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-3: Testing and
EN 61000-4-3 measurement techniques-Radiated, radio-frequency,
electromagnetic field immunity test
IEC 61000-4-4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-4: Testing and
EN 61000-4-4 measurement techniques-Electrical fast transient/burst
immunity test
IEC 61000-4-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-5: Testing and
EN 61000-4-5 measurement techniques-Surge immunity test

IEC 61000-4-6 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-6: Testing and


EN 61000-4-6 measurement techniques-Immunity to conducted
disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields
IEC 61000-4-29 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-29: Testing
EN 61000-4-29 and measurement techniques-Voltage dips, shot
interruptions and voltage variations on d.c. input power
port immunity tests
CISPR 22/EN 55022 Information technology equipment-Radio disturbance
characteristics-Limits and methods of measurement
CISPR 24/EN 55024 Information technology equipment-immunity
charateristics-Limits and methods of measurement
ETSI EN 300386 Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters
(ERM); Telecommunication network equipment;
ElectroMagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 215 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Standard Description

ETSI EN 201468 Elecromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters


(ERM); Additional electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
telecommunications equipment for enhanced availability of
service in specific applications
ETSI EN 300132-2 Power supply interface at the input totelecommunications
equipment; Part 2: Operated by direct current (dc).

A.7 Safety Compliance Standards


Table A-7 Safety compliance related standards
Standard Description

EN 60950 Information technology equipment - safety


IEC 950 Safety of information technology equipment including
electrical business equipment
CAN/CSA-C22.2 Audio, video and similar electronic equipment
No 1-M94
CAN/CSA-C22.2 Safety of information technology equipment
No 950-95
73/23/EEC Low voltage directive
UL 60950-1 Safety of information technology equipment
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)

A.8 Protection Standards


Table A-8 Protection related standards
Standard Description

IEC 61024-1 Protection of structures against lightning


IEC 61312-1 Protection against lightning electromagnetic impulse part I:
general principles
IEC 61000-4-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)- Part 4: Testing and
measurement techniques - Section 5: Surge immunity test
ITU-T K.11 Principles of protection against overvoltage and overcurrents
ITU-T K.20 Resistibility of telecommunication switching equipment to
overvoltages and overcurrents

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 216 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Standard Description

ITU-T K.27 Bonding configurations and earthing inside a


telecommunication building
ITU-T K.41 Resistibility of internal interfaces of telecommunication
centres to surge overvoltages

A.9 ASON Standards


Table A-9 ASON related standards
Standard Description

G.807 Requirements for automatic switched transport networks


(ASTN)
G.8080 Architecture for the automatically switched optical network
(ASON)
G.7712 Architecture and specification of data communication network
G.7713 Distributed call and connection management (DCM) based on
PNNI
G.7714 Protocol for automatic discovery in SDH and OTN networks
G.7715 ASON routing architecture and requirements for link state
protocols
G.7716 Control plane initial establishment, reconfiguration and
recovery
G.7717 Connection admission control
G.7718 Framework for ASON management
RFC 3471 Signaling functional description
(GMPLS)

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 217 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

B Basic Principle

The basic principle includes the SDH basic principle, Ethernet basic principle, and
ATM basic principle.

B.1 Introduction to SDH


This section describes the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) levels, multiplexing
structures, frame structures, and overhead bytes.

B.1.1 SDH Levels


The first level bit rate of SDH is 155520 kbit/s. Signals of higher levels can be
generated by interleaving N signals of the base SDH level (N=4, 16, 64).
See Table B-1.

Table B-1 SDH levels and the corresponding bit rates


SDH level Bit rate (kbit/s)

STM-1 155520
STM-4 622080
STM-16 2488320
STM-64 9953280
STM-64 (out-of-band FEC) 10664228

B.1.2 Multiplexing Structure


The multiplexing structure of the equipment complies with the requirements specified
in the ITU-T Recommendations.
The multiplexing structure of OptiX OSN products series is shown in Figure B-1.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 219 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure B-1 Multiplexing structure


STM-64 AU-4-64c VC-4-64c C4-64c
×4
× 64
STM-16 AU-4-16c VC-4-16c C4-16c
×4 ×16
× 16
STM-4 AU-4-4c VC-4-4c C4-4c

×4
STM-1 AUG-1 AU-4 VC-4 C-4

×3
×3 ×1
TUG-3 TU-3 VC-3
Pointer ×7
justification AU-3 VC-3 C-3
TUG-2
Multiplexing ×3
TU-12 VC-12 C-12
Aligning ×4

TU-11 VC-11 C-11


Mapping

B.1.3 Basic Frame Structure


The SDH basic frame structure consists of the RSOH, MSOH, POH, AU pointer, and
payload.
Figure B-2 shows the STM-N frame structure.

Figure B-2 STM-N frame structure


270 X N columns (bytes)
9 X N columns (bytes) 261 X N columns (bytes)
Transmission direction
1
High-order path overhead POH

2 Regenerator section overhead


RSOH
3

4 Administrative unit pointer (s) AU-PTR


STM-N payload 9 rows
5
Payload
6
Multiplex section overhead
7
MSOH
8

Frame n-1 Frame n Frame n+1 Information code stream


9 X 270 X N bytes
Frame cycle: 125 µ s
Scrambler: X 7 + X 6 +1 T=125 µs

B.1.4 SOH Description


The SOH bytes include STM-1 SOH bytes, STM-4 SOH bytes, STM-16 SOH bytes,
and STM-64 SOH bytes.

STM-1 SOH
Figure B-3 shows the structure of STM-1 SOH.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 220 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure B-3 STM-1 SOH


9 columns

* *
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0
RSOH
B1 E1 F1

D1 D2 D3 Serial
1
Serial
2

AU-PTR

9
rows B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
Serial
D4 4
D5 D6

D7 D8 D9 MSOH

Serial
D10 D11 D12 3

S1 M1 E2

X Bytes reserved for national use


* Unscrambled bytes
Media dependent bytes
Note: All unmarked bytes are reserved for
future international standardization
(for media dependent,additional national use
and other purpose).

STM-4 SOH
Figure B-4 shows the structure of STM-4 SOH.

Figure B-4 STM-4 SOH


36 columns

* Z0
* Z0
* * * * * * * * *
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 J0 Z0

B1 E1 F1 RSOH

D1 D2 D3

9 AU-PTR
rows
B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 K1 K2

D4 D5 D6
MSOH
D7 D8 D9

D10 D11 D12

S1 M1 E2

x Bytes reserved for national use


* Unscrambled bytes
Note: All unmarded bytes are reserved for future international standardization
(for media dependent, additional national use and other purpose).

STM-16 SOH
Figure B-5 shows the structure of STM-16 SOH.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 221 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure B-5 STM-16 SOH


144 columns

A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 * * * * *
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 J0 Z0

B1 E1 F1

D1 D2 D3
9 AU-PTR
rows
B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 K1 K2

D4 D5 D6

D7 D8 D9

D10 D11 D12

S1 E2

x Bytes reserved for national use M1


* Unscrambled bytes
Note: All unmarded bytes are reserved for future international standardization
(for media dependent, additional national use and other purpose).

STM-64 SOH
Figure B-6 shows the structure of STM-64 SOH.

Figure B-6 STM-64 SOH


576 columns

* * * * *
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 J0 Z0

B1 E1 F1

D1 D2 D3
9 AU-PTR
rows
B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 K1 K2

D4 D5 D6

D7 D8 D9

D10 D11 D12

S1 E2

x Bytes reserved for national use


* Unscrambled bytes M1

Note: All unmarded bytes are reserved for future international standardization
(for media dependent, additional national use and other purpose).

SOH Bytes Description

Table B-2 SOH bytes description


Byte Description

A1, A2 Framing byte (A1 = F6H, A2 = 28H)


B1 Regenerator section error monitoring BIP-8 byte

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 222 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Byte Description

B2 Multiplex section error monitoring BIP-24×N byte


D1, D2 and D3 Regenerator section DCC channel byte, 192 kbit/s
D4–D12 Multiplex section DCC channel byte, 576 kbit/s
E1 Regenerator section orderwire byte, 64 kbit/s
E2 Multiplex section orderwire byte, 64 kbit/s
F1 User channel byte (to provide temporary data/voice
channel connections for special maintenance purpose)
H1, H2 Administrative unit pointer byte
H3 Positive or negative justification opportunity byte
J0 Regenerator section trace byte
K1, K2 (b1–b5) Multiplex section automatic protection switching (APS)
channel byte
K2 (b6–b8) Multiplex section remote defect indication (MS-RDI) byte
M1 Multiplex section remote error indication (MS-REI) byte
S1 (b5–b8) Synchronization status byte
Serial 1–4 Broadcast data byte
Others To be determined

B.1.5 Path Overhead (POH) Bytes Description


The POH bytes include the higher order POH bytes and lower order POH bytes.

Higher Order Path Overhead Description

Table B-3 VC-3/VC-4/VC-4-xc POH bytes description


Byte Description

J1 Path trace byte


B3 Path BIP-8 byte
C2 Signal label byte
G1 Path status byte
F2, F3 Path user channels byte
H4 Position indicator byte
K3 (b1-b4) Automatic protection switching (APS) channel byte

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 223 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Byte Description

K3 (b5-b8) Spare byte


N1 Network operator byte
NOTE
The VC-4 POH is located in the first column of the 9-row in the 261-column VC-4 structure.
The VC-4-xc POH is located in the first column of the 9-row in the 261 x X-column VC-4-Xc
structure (cascaded by X VC-4s).

Lower Order Path Overhead Description

Table B-4 VC-12 POH bytes description


Byte Description

V5 V5 byte (error checking, signal label and path status)


J2 Path trace byte
N2 Network operator byte
K4 Automatic protection switching (APS) channel byte

B.2 Introduction to ATM


This section describes the ATM cell structure and provides an overview of the ATM
technology.

B.2.1 Introduction to ATM


The OptiX OSN product series can transmit, converge, and forward ATM services.

Definition of ATM
The asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) is a cell-based technology, which consists of
the transmission, multiplexing, and switching technologies. The switching technology
of the ATM combines the advantages of packet switching and circuit switching. The
ATM adopts the statistical multiplexing mode to realize fast packet switching. In this
way, the ATM ensures the bandwidth utilization efficiency, and supports the real-time
services of high rates and low rates.

Advantages of ATM
 Sharing and statistic multiplexing of line bandwidth
 Capable of carrying multiple types of services and providing Quality of Service
(QoS) service
 High-speed hardware switching because of fixed cell length
 Mature in technology and high standardization

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 224 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

 Extensive support from the telecommunication field


 Good network interconnection and interworking capability
In the OSN product series, inverse multiplexing over ATM (IMA) technology is used to
transmit ATM services. That is, a high-speed ATM link is transmitted over multiple
low-speed physical links. For example, three E1s are used to transmit one 6 Mbit/s
ATM link through IMA technology.

B.2.2 ATM Cell Structure


An ATM cell is of a fixed length, which is 53 bytes. An ATM cell consists of the cell
header and cell payload.
Figure B-7 shows the ATM cell structure.

Figure B-7 ATM cell structure


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Header GFC VPI VPI


(5 bytes) VPI VCI VPI VCI
VCI VCI
Payload VCI PT CLP
VCI PT CLP
(48 bytes)
HEC HEC

ATM cell UNI header structure NNI header structure

GFC: general flow control VPI : virtual path identification VCI : virtual channel identification
PT : payload type CLP : cell loss priority HEC : header error control
UNI : user network interface NNI : network node interface

The contents of the ATM cell header at the UNI are slightly different from the contents
of the ATM cell header at the NNI. The difference is that the ATM cell header at the
UNI contains GFC requirements.

B.3 Introduction to Ethernet


This section describes the Ethernet basic principle and frame structure.

B.3.1 Basic Technologies


The equipment supports the transmission of Ethernet services.

Half-Duplex CSMA/CD
According to the initial design objective of Ethernet, the computers and other digital
equipment are connected through a shared physical line. The computers and digital
equipment connected in this way must enter the physical line in the half-duplex mode.
In addition, the design must provide a mechanism to detect and avoid conflict, and to
prevent equipment contending for the line at the same time. This is called CSMA/CD.
A piece of terminal equipment detects the status of the shared line continuously and
transmits data only in the idle status. Otherwise, it waits until the line is idle. At this
time, if another piece of equipment transmits data, the data sent by the two inevitably
conflicts, making the signal on the line unstable. After detecting the conflict, the

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 225 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

terminal equipment stops transmitting the data quickly and then sends a succession of
interfering pulse. After waiting for a period of time, it sends the data again.
The purpose of sending the interfering pulse is to notify the other equipment, that is,
the equipment that sends the data at the same time, that a conflict occurs on the line.
The waiting time after detection of conflict is random but gradually increases.

Full-Duplex Ethernet and Ethernet Switch


In 1990, the appearance of the 10BAST-T Ethernet based on the twisted pair cable is
the most important event in the history of Ethernet. Using twisted pair cable as the
transmission medium of Ethernet not only increases the flexibility and reduces the
cost, but also introduces the full duplex mode, which is an efficient operation mode.
In the full-duplex mode, the data is transmitted and received simultaneously. The
traditional network equipment hub does not support full-duplex, because inside the
hub is a bus, over which data is transmitted and received, therefore there is no way for
full-duplex communication. To achieve full-duplex, a new type of equipment namely
the switch must be introduced.
The switch and the hub are the same in appearance. They both have multiple ports,
each of which connects to the terminal equipment and other multiple-port equipment.
Instead of a shared bus, there is a digital cross-connect network inside the switch,
which temporarily connects every terminal, enabling the terminals to transmit data
independently. In addition, the switch sets a buffer area for each port, storing the data
transmitted from terminals temporarily, and performs switching after idle resources are
available. It is the appearance of the switch that changes the original 10/100 Mbit/s
shared structure to 20/200 Mbit/s exclusive structure, greatly enhancing the
transmission efficiency. In addition, certain software can be added to the switch to
implement additional services, such as VLAN, priority, redundant link.

Auto Negotiation
In actual situations, Ethernet can transmit data in the full duplex mode or half duplex
mode at the rate of 10 Mbit/s, or 100 Mbit/s, through type 5 twisted pair cable or type 3
twisted pair. If each terminal equipment is configured manually, it will be difficult to
maintain the equipment. Auto negotiation provides a solution for addressing this
problem.
Through auto negotiation, the equipment at both ends of a physical link selects a
transmission mode automatically by exchanging information. Auto negotiation is
based on the Ethernet connected by using a twisted pair cable, which is only effective
for such an Ethernet. The contents of auto negotiation include the duplex mode, bit
rate, flow control. If the negotiation passes, the equipment at both ends of the link
works in the mode negotiated.

B.3.2 Ethernet Frame Structure


The OptiX OSN product series support Ethernet frame structures of three protocol
types: Ethernet_II, 802.3, and Ethernet_SNAP.
Figure B-8 shows the Ethernet frame structure of OSN product series.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 226 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Figure B-8 Ethernet frame structure


Unit: byte

6 6 2 46-1500 4
Destination
MAC
Source MAC Protocol type Data FCS
Ethernet_II

6 6 2 1 1 1 43-1497 4
Destination Protocol
Source MAC length
DSAP SSAP CTL Data FCS
MAC
802.3

6 6 2 1 1 1 3 2 38-1492 4
Destination Protocol
MAC
Source MAC
length 0xAA 0xAA CTL OC Protocol type Data FCS
Ethernet_SNAP

B.4 Link Aggregation


This section describes the basic principle of link aggregation and the relevant frame
structure.

B.4.1 Concepts
Link aggregation means bundling multiple physical links that are connected to one
piece of equipment. The aggregated links are considered as one link.
As shown in Figure B-9.

Figure B-9 Schematic diagram of link aggregation

traffic

B.4.2 Characteristics
Link aggregation includes manual aggregation, static aggregation, and dynamic
aggregation.

Enhancing Link Availability


In link aggregation, links back up each other dynamically. When a link breaks, the
other links can quickly provide a backup. The switching process takes place within the
aggregation. It is unrelated with other links.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 227 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Increasing Link Capacity


The aggregation technology can improve the link transmission capability economically.
Without upgrading the existing equipment, the user can obtain a data link of larger
bandwidth, which is equal to the capacity of a number of physical links. The
aggregation module allocates the traffic to different members according to a certain
algorithm to realize load balancing at link level.

Aggregation Types
There are three aggregation types: manual aggregation, static aggregation, and
dynamic aggregation.
 Manual aggregation
The aggregation is manually configured, and the port does not run the link
aggregation control protocol (LACP).
 Static aggregation
The aggregation is manually configured, and the port runs the LACP.
 Dynamic aggregation
The LACP based on IEEE 802.3ad is used.

B.5 Introduction to MPLS


This section describes the MPLS basic principle and frame structure.

B.5.1 Overview
MPLS is short for multi-protocol label switching.
MPLS is a standard routing and switching technology platform that supports various
upper layer protocols and services
The MPLS architecture consists of the following:
 Control plane, which is connectionless and implemented with the current IP
network.
 Forwarding plane, also called data plane, is connection-oriented, and takes
advantage of the Layer 2 network such as ATM and frame relay.
MPLS uses a short label of fixed length to encapsulate packets, and implements fast
forwarding on the data plane. MPLS uses powerful, flexible routing functions of the IP
network on the control plane to address various new applications.
MPLS is originated from the Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4), and its core technology
can be extended to multiple network protocols, including the Internet Protocol version
6 (IPv6), Internet Packet Exchange (IPX), Appletalk, DECnet, Connectionless
Network Protocol (CLNP). "Multiprotocol" in the MPLS denotes supporting multiple
network protocols.
OSN product series support the use of MPLS on IPv4, IPv6 and IPX.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 228 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

B.5.2 Encapsulation Format


The MPLS label is usually added before Layer 2 headers and Layer 3 headers. The
OptiX OSN equipment supports MPLS encapsulation formats such as MartinioE and
MatinioP.
Figure B-10 shows the two encapsulation formats. The encapsulation content is
marked in grey.

Figure B-10 MPLS encapsulation format


Unit : byte
MartinioE encapsulation format
DA SA 0x8847(0x8848
0x8847 (0x8848 broadcast) Tunnel VC Ethernet data
A A
66 66 2 2 4 4 4 4 N

MartinioP encapsulation format

0x8847(0x8848
0x8847 (0x8848 broadcast)) Tunnel
Tunnel VC
VC Ethernet data

2 4 4 44 N

The meanings of the bytes in Figure B-10 are shown in Table B-5.

Table B-5 The meanings of the bytes in the MPLS encapsulation format
Name Meaning

DA Destination address
SA Source address
Tunnel Tunnel label
VC Virtual channel
0x8847 MPLS Martini encapsulation format
0x8848 Broadcast frame

B.6 QinQ Principle


This section describes the QinQ basic principle and frame structure.

B.6.1 Introduction to QinQ


The QinQ is a VLAN stack embedding technology, which complies with the S-VLAN
requirements in IEEE 802.1ad. The QinQ technology supplements the VLAN
technology that complies with IEEE 802.1q.
The advantages of QinQ technology are as follows:

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 229 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

 Expands VLAN and alleviates VLAN resource insufficiency. For example, a VLAN
providing 4096 VLAN IDs can provide 4096×4096 VLANs after VLAN stacking.
 Extends LAN service to WAN, connecting the client network to the carrier network
and supporting transparent transmission.

B.6.2 QinQ Data Frame Structure


The QinQ data frame involves the types of VLAN labels, which include S-VLAN labels
and C-VLAN labels.

VLAN Label Types


IEEE 802.1ad defines two VLAN label types, as shown in Figure B-11.
 Customer VLAN label, defined as C-VLAN.
 Server layer VLAN label, defined as S-VLAN.

Figure B-11 QinQ data frame structure


6 Bytes 6 Bytes 4 Bytes 4 Bytes 2 Bytes 4 Bytes

Destination Source
S-VLAN label C-VLAN label Length/type Data FCS
MAC MAC

The maximum length of the frame is determined by the port attribute settings of the
equipment.

Structure of S-VLAN and C-VLAN


The 4-byte S-VLAN and C-VLAN labels can be further divided into two parts: TPID
and TCI, each of which has two bytes.
 TPID
TPID indicates the type of the VLAN label. The TPID of C-VLAN is fixed to 0X8100
and that of S-VLAN is configurable, as shown in Table B-6.

Table B-6 TPID settings


Tag type Name ID

C-VLAN TAG 802.1Q Tag Protocol Type (802.1Q TagType) 0X8100


S-VLAN TAG 802.1Q Service Tag Type (802.1Q S Tag Type) Configurable

C-VLAN tag (C-TAG) is used to identify the customer VLAN and is used on the VLAN
Bridge and PEB equipment.
S-VLAN tag (S-TAG) is used to identify the server VLAN and is used on the PB and
PEB equipment.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 230 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

 TCI
The TCI structure of S-TAG is basically the same as that of C-TAG, as shown in Figure
B-12 and Figure B-13. VLAN ID (VID) is still 12 bits, ranging from 0 to 4095. The
difference is that S-TAG introduces the concept of Drop Eligible (DE). Priority code
point (PCP), used with DE, indicates the priority of the S-TAG frame.

Figure B-12 C-TAG TCI structure

Octets: 1 2
PCP CFI VID

Bits: 8 6 5 4 1 8 1

Figure B-13 S-TAG TCI structure

Octets: 1 2
PCP DE VID

Bits: 8 6 5 4 1 8 1

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 231 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

C Glossary

1+1 protection A 1+1 protection architecture has one normal traffic signal, one working
SNC/trail, one protection SNC/trail and a permanent bridge.
1:N protection A 1:N protection architecture has N normal traffic signals, N working
SNCs/trails and one protection SNC/trail. It may have one extra traffic signal.

3R Regeneration, Retiming, and Reshaping.


A
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode. A transfer mode in which the information is
organized into cells; it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells
containing information from an individual user is not necessarily periodic. It is a
protocol within the OSI layer 1. An ATM cell consists of a 5 octet header
followed by 48 octets of data.

B
Bandwidth The value numerically equal to the lowest frequency at which the magnitude of
the baseband transfer function of an optical fiber decreases to a specified
fraction, generally to -3 dB optical (-6 dB electrical), of the zero frequency
value. The bandwidth is limited by several mechanisms: mainly modal
distortion and chromatic dispersion in multimode fibers.
BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply. A building timing supply that minimizes the
number of synchronization links entering an office. It is sometimes referred to
as a synchronization supply unit.
Build-in WDM A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into the OSN product
series. That is, the OSN products can add and drop several wavelengths
directly.

C
Congestion The condition that exists in a network, if the capacity required for the
instantaneous traffic exceeds the bandwidth available in the network.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 233 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

Control plane A set of communicating entities that are responsible for the establishment of
connections including set-up, release, supervision and maintenance. A control
plane is supported by a signaling network.
Convergence The process of developing a model of the echo path which will be used in the
echo estimator to produce the estimate of the circuit echo.
Conversion In the context of message handling, a transmittal event in which an MTA
transforms parts of a message content from one encoded information type to
another, or alters a probe so that it appears that the described messages were
modified.

D
Distributed A transaction, parts of which may be carried out in more than one open
transaction system.
DNI Dual Node Interconnection. Both ring networks have two nodes that are
interconnected with each other. DNI not only provides protection for ring-cross
services but also for the failed node of two interconnected nodes. Therefore, it
improves the network availability.

E
EPL Ethernet Private Line. An EPL service is a point-to-point interconnection
between two UNIs without SDH bandwidth sharing. Transport bandwidth is
never shared between different customers.
EPLn Ethernet Private LAN. An EPLn service is a LAN service and a private service.
Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers.
EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line. An EVPL service is a service that is both a line
service and a virtual private service.
EVPLn Ethernet Virtual Private Local Area Network. An EVPLn service is a service
that is both a LAN service and a virtual private service.
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

F
Fairness algorithm A mechanism that enforces fairness among the nodes on the ring. It applies
only to LP and excess medium priority traffic coming from the MAC client.
Each node is assigned a weight, which allows the user to allocate more ring
bandwidth to certain nodes.
FEC Forward error correction. It is a technology used for enhancing the reliability of
digital transmission. It can increase the transmission distance and improve the
network performance.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 234 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

I
IMA Inverse Multiplexing for ATM. The ATM inverse multiplexing technique
involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical
fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose
rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is referred to as an IMA
group.
IMA frame The IMA frame is used as the unit of control in the IMA protocol. It is a logical
frame defined as M consecutive cells, numbered 0 to M-l, transmitted on each
of the N links in an IMA group.
IMA group Group of links at one end used to establish an IMA virtual link to other end.
IMA sublayer Sublayer part of the physical layer that is located between the interface
specific Transmission Convergence (TC) sublayer and the ATM layer.
IMA virtual link Virtual link established between two IMA units over a number of physical links
(IMA group).
ASON service Service that is configured directly by the T2000. The service within the
transmission network is requested by the T2000 and then created by the
control plane of the NE through signaling.
IP over DCC The IP Over DCC follows the TCP/IP telecommunications standards and
controls the remote NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that
the IP over DCC uses overhead DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for
communication.

L
Loopback The fault of each path on the optical fiber can be located by setting the
loopback for each path of the line. There are three kinds of loopback modes:
No loopback, outloop, inloop.

M
MSP Multiplex Section Protection. The MSP function provides the capability for
switching a signal from a working section to a protection section.
Multiplexer An equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer
number of aggregate bearer channels, where the relationship between the
tributary and aggregate channels are fixed.

O
Orderwire It establishes the voice communication among the operators and maintenance
engineers working in each working station.
Overhead Auxiliary Channel Overhead Information is information that may be transferred
information by an optical network layer, but which does not have to be associated with a
particular connection. An example of such an auxiliary channel is a data
communications channel used for the purposes of transferring management
data between management entities. These management entities are not trail
termination and adaptation functions.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 235 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

P
Paired slot Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on
the backplane. When the SCC unit is faulty or offline, the overheads can be
passed through between the paired slots by using the directly connected
overhead bus. When two SDH boards form an MSP ring, the boards need to
be inserted in paired slots so that the K bytes can be passed through.

R
RPR Resilient Packet Ring. A metropolitan area network (MAN) technology
supporting data transfer among stations interconnected in a dual-ring
configuration.
Regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the
amplitudes, waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within
specified limits.

S
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. A hierarchical set of digital transport
structures, standardized for the transport of suitably adapted payloads over
physical transmission networks.
SNCP SubNetwork Connection Protection. A working subnetwork connection is
replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork
connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level.
SNCMP Subnetwork Connection Multi-protection. The source broadcasts services to
multiple paths, and the sink determines which service needs to be received
according to the service priority and the service quality.
SNCTP Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection. It provides protection paths at the
VC-4 level. When the working path is faulty, all the services in the working
path are switched to the protection path.
SLA Service Level Agreement. A negotiated agreement between an end user and
the service provider. Its significance varies according to the service offerings.
The SLA may include a number of attributes such as, but not limited to, traffic
contract, availability, performance, encryption, authentication, pricing and
billing mechanism .
Service plane The service plane comprises: a) service presentation functionality being
presented to the end user; b) service implementation aspects with which the
end user interacts. For example, service invocation, control service level
agreement function. The service presentation and service implementation
aspects use the totality of the transfer capabilities including control and
management functionalities.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 236 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

T
TPS Tributary Protection Switching. A function provided by the equipment, which is
intended to protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary
processing board.
TCM Tandem Connection Monitor. In the SDH transport hierarchy, the TCM is
located between the AU/TU management layer and HP/LP layer. It uses the
N1/N2 byte of POH overhead to monitor the quality of the transport channels
on a transmission section (TCM section).
Timeslot Single timeslot on a E1 digital interface—that is, a 64-kbps, synchronous,
full-duplex data channel, typically used for a single voice connection.

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 237 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

D Acronyms and Abbreviations

This chapter lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this manual.

A
ABR Available Bit Rate
ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer
AMI Alternate Mark Inversion
APS Automatic Protection Switching
ASON Automatically Switched Optical Network
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode

B
BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply System
BPA Optical Booster & Pre-amplifier Unit

C
CAR Committed Access Rate
CBR Constant Bit Rate
CC Continuity Check
CF Compact Flash
CMI Coded Mark Inversion
CR-LDP Constrained Route Label Distribution Protocol
CSPF Constrained Shortest Path First

D
DCC Data Communication Channels

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 239 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

DCE Data Circuit-terminal Equipment


DDN Digital Data Network
DVB-ASI Digital Video Broadcast-Asynchronous Serial Interface
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing

E
ECC Embedded Control Channel
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EPL Ethernet Private Line
EPLAN Ethernet Private LAN
ESCON Enterprise Systems Connection
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line
EVPLAN Ethernet Virtual Private LAN

F
FC Fiber Channel
FE Fast Ethernet
FEC Forward Error Correction
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array

G
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GFP Generic Framing Procedure
GMPLS General Multiprotocol Label Switching

H
HDB3 High Density Bipolar of order 3 code
HDLC High level Data Link Control

I
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 240 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers


IETF Internet Engineering Task Force
IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol
IMA Inverse Multiplexing for ATM
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication
Standardization Sector

L
LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAN Local Area Network; Local Area Network
LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH
LB Loopback
LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCT Local Craft Terminal
LPT Link State Path Through
LSP Label Switch Path

M
MAC Media Access Control
MADM Multi Add/Drop Multiplexer
MCF Message Communication Function
MLM Multi-Longitudinal Mode (laser)
MPLS Multiprotocol Label Switching
MSP Multiplex Section Protection

N
NEBS Network Equipment-Building System
nrt-VBR Non-Real Time Variable Bite rate
NS Network Side
NSF Non-interrupted Service Forwarding

O
OADM Optical Add/drop Multiplexer

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 241 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance


OAM&P Operation, Administration, Maintenance and Provision
OSP OptiX Software Platform
OTM Optical Terminal Multiplexer

P
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PE Provider Edge
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol

Q
QoS Quality of Service

R
RPR Resilient Packet Ring
RSTP Rapid Span Tree Protocol
rt-VBR Real Time Variable Bite rate
RSVP-TE Resource Reservation Setup Protocol with Traffic-Engineering Extensions

S
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SFP Small Form Pluggable
SLA Service Level Agreement
SLM Single-Longitudinal Mode (laser)
SNCP Subnetwork Connection Protection
SNCMP Subnetwork Connection Multi-protection
SNCTP Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection
STP Span Tree Protocol

T
TCM Tandem Connection Monitoring
TPS Tributary Protection Switching

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 242 of 243


OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description

U
UBR Unspecified Bit Rate

V
VC Virtual Channel
VCC Virtual Channel Connection
VLAN Virtual Local Area Network
VP Virtual Path
VPC Virtual Path Connection
VPN Virtual Private Network

W
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WTR Wait-to-Restore

Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 243 of 243